Casio Ctk 7300In Owners Manual CTK7300IN_e

CTK-7300IN Web_CTK7300IN-E-1A_EN CTK-7300IN | Electronic Musical Instruments | Manuals | CASIO

2015-03-09

: Casio Casio-Ctk-7300In-Owners-Manual-590483 casio-ctk-7300in-owners-manual-590483 casio pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 168 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

CTK7300IN-E-1A

CTK-7300IN

USER’S GUIDE

Please keep all information for future reference.

Safety Precautions

Before trying to use the keyboard, be sure to read the

separate “Safety Precautions”.

MA1307-A Printed in China

CTK7300IN_e_Cover1-4.fm 1 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時６分

Important!

Please note the following important information before using this product.

• Before using the optional AC Adaptor to power the unit, be sure to check the AC Adaptor for any damage first. Carefully check

the power cord for breakage, cuts, exposed wire and other serious damage. Never let children use an AC adaptor that is

seriously damaged.

• Never attempt to recharge batteries.

• Do not use rechargeable batteries.

• Never mix old batteries with new ones.

• Use recommended batteries or equivalent types.

• Always make sure that positive (+) and negative (–) poles are facing correctly as indicated near the battery compartment.

• Replace batteries as soon as possible after any sign they are getting weak.

• Do not short-circuit the battery terminals.

• The product is not intended for children under 3 years.

• Use only a CASIO AD-A12150LW adaptor.

• The AC adaptor is not a toy.

• Be sure to disconnect the AC adaptor before cleaning the product.

●Any reproduction of the contents of this manual, either in part or its entirety, is prohibited. Except for your own, personal

use, any other use of the contents of this manual without the consent of CASIO is prohibited under copyright laws.

●IN NO EVENT SHALL CASIO BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,

DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE

USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT, EVEN IF CASIO HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

●The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.

●The actual appearance of the product may be different from that shown in the illustrations in this User’s Guide.

●Company and product names used in this manual may be registered trademarks of others.

This mark applies in EU countries only.

Manufacturer:

CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.

6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan

Responsible within the European Union:

CASIO EUROPE GmbH

Casio-Platz 1, 22848 Norderstedt, Germany

Declaration of Conformity According to EU Directive

E-1

CTK7300IN_e.book 3 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-2

Contents

General Guide ............................. E-4

Reading the Display ............................................... E-6

Modes..................................................................... E-7

Menus..................................................................... E-7

, Precautions while “Please Wait” is displayed.... E-7

Saving Settings....................................................... E-8

Returning the Digital Keyboard to Its

Factory Default Settings ......................................... E-8

Getting Ready to Play ................ E-9

Preparing the Music Stand ..................................... E-9

Power Supply ......................................................... E-9

Connections.............................. E-11

Connecting Headphones ...................................... E-11

Connecting a Pedal .............................................. E-11

Outputting Digital Keyboard Sound to

Audio Equipment or an Amplifier .......................... E-11

Outputting Input from an External Device or a

Microphone through the Digital Keyboard’s

Speakers .............................................................. E-12

Bundled and Optional Accessories....................... E-12

Selecting and

Playing a Tone .......................... E-13

To turn on Digital Keyboard power ....................... E-13

Listening to Demo Tunes...................................... E-14

Selecting a Tone................................................... E-14

Layering and Splitting Tones ................................ E-15

Raising and Lowering Keyboard Tuning

(Transpose) .......................................................... E-18

Using Octave Shift................................................ E-18

Using the Metronome ........................................... E-19

Using the Pitch Bend Wheel................................. E-20

Applying Vibrato to Notes ..................................... E-20

Selecting a Temperament and

Fine Tuning Its Scale............................................ E-21

Playing Arpeggio Phrases Automatically

(Arpeggiator)......................................................... E-23

Using Auto Accompaniment ... E-24

Playing an Auto Accompaniment.......................... E-24

Selecting a Chord Fingering Mode ....................... E-26

Modifying Auto Accompaniment Patterns............. E-27

Using One-Touch Presets .................................... E-27

Using Auto Harmonize.......................................... E-28

Applying Effects to a Sound.... E-29

Configuration of Effects ........................................ E-29

Selecting an Effect................................................ E-31

Creating a User DSP ............................................ E-33

Using the Mixer ......................... E-36

Mixer Overview..................................................... E-36

Mixer Operation .................................................... E-37

Mixer Parameter Settings ..................................... E-41

Using the Tone Editor............... E-44

Tone Creation Overview....................................... E-44

Creating a User Tone ........................................... E-46

Tone Parameter Settings...................................... E-48

Using Drawbar Organ Tones ... E-50

Playing with a Drawbar Organ Tone..................... E-50

Editing Drawbar Organ Tones .............................. E-52

Music Presets............................ E-54

Using Music Presets............................................. E-54

Creating a User Preset ......................................... E-58

Editing a Chord Progression................................. E-62

Saving Keyboard Setups to

Registration Memory ................E-66

To save a setup to registration memory ............... E-67

To recall a setup from registration memory .......... E-67

Using the Song Sequencer ...... E-68

Starting One-touch Recording (EASY REC) ........ E-68

What you can do with the song sequencer........... E-70

Recording Individual Tracks ................................. E-72

Re-recording Part of a Song

(Punch-in Recording)............................................ E-76

Using Panel Record to Rewrite Song

Header Settings.................................................... E-78

Playing a Recorded Song..................................... E-79

Editing a Song ...................................................... E-81

Editing a Track...................................................... E-85

Editing Events....................................................... E-87

Directly Inputting Note Events (Step Input) ........ E-100

CTK7300IN_e.book 2 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Contents

E-3

Using the Pattern

Sequencer ............................... E-102

About the Pattern Sequencer ............................. E-102

Creating a User Rhythm ..................................... E-103

Creating a User Rhythm by Combining

Exiting Rhythm Parts (Easy Edit) ....................... E-112

Editing Individual Events (Event Editor) ............. E-113

Configuring Instrument Part Playback Settings

(Part Parameters) ............................................... E-116

Instrument Part Operations ................................ E-118

Accompaniment Pattern and Rhythm

Operations .......................................................... E-120

Recording and

Playing Audio.......................... E-121

Audio Recording and Playback Functions.......... E-121

Audio Recording and Playback Precautions ...... E-121

Performing Audio Recording .............................. E-122

Playing Back Audio............................................. E-126

Using the Function Menu....... E-130

Using the Function Menu.................................... E-130

Function Menu Settings...................................... E-131

Using a Memory Card............. E-136

Loading and Removing a Memory Card............. E-137

Entering the Card Mode ..................................... E-137

Formatting a Memory Card................................. E-137

Saving Digital Keyboard Data to a

Memory Card...................................................... E-138

Loading Data from a Memory Card .................... E-140

To delete a file from a memory card................... E-141

To rename a file on a memory card.................... E-141

Playing a Music File from a Memory Card.......... E-142

Connecting to a Computer .... E-145

Minimum Computer System Requirements........ E-145

Storing and Loading Digital Keyboard

Memory Data ...................................................... E-146

Using Rhythm (Auto Accompaniment)

Data from another Model.................................... E-146

Importing Data from Various Storage Media ...... E-147

Reference................................. E-148

Error Messages .................................................. E-148

Troubleshooting.................................................. E-150

Specifications ..................................................... E-152

Operating Precautions........................................ E-154

DSP Effect List ................................................... E-155

Fingering Guide.................................................. E-160

Supported Input Characters ............................... E-160

Assigning a MIDI Channel to Each Part ............. E-161

Parameter List .................................................... E-162

Chord Example List ............................................ E-163

Button Number Reference.................................. E-164

MIDI Implementation Chart

CTK7300IN_e.book 3 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-4

General Guide

• There is the “Button Number Reference” at the back of this manual. You can tear it out and refer to the button numbers

as required.

Back

Dial

L-1

L-17 C-1

C-17

R-1

R-20D-1

D-12

S-1

T-1

T-10

S-2

CTK7300IN_e.book 4 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

General Guide

E-5

• In this manual, the term “Digital Keyboard” refers to the CTK-7300IN.

• This manual uses the numbers and names below to refer to buttons and controllers.

• The following explains the meanings of the # and $ symbols that appear on the product console and with the key names below.

#: Indicates a function that is enabled by holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button when pressing a button. For example, SONG SEQUENCER, #

EDIT means that the EDIT function is enabled by depressing the R-13 (FUNCTION) button.

$: Indicates a function that is enabled by holding down the button for some time. For example, METRONOME, BEAT $ means that the BEAT function is

enabled by holding down the button for some time.

L-1 P (POWER) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞13

L-2 VOLUME knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞13

RHYTHM buttons

L-3 [A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 24

L-4 [B] JAZZ/EUROPEAN button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞24

L-5 [C] LATIN/WORLD button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞24

L-6 [D] INDIAN, MUSIC PRESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞24, 54

L-7 [E] PIANO RHYTHMS,

ONE TOUCH PRESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞24, 27, 54

L-8 [F] USER RHYTHMS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞24, 27

L-9 METRONOME, $BEAT button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞19

L-10 TEMPO w button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞19

L-11 TEMPO q, #TAP button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞19

RHYTHM/SONG CONTROLLER buttons

L-12 INTRO, REPEAT button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞27, 80, 142

L-13 NORMAL/FILL-IN, sREW button . . . . . . . ☞14, 27, 79, 142

L-14 VARIATION/FILL-IN, dFF button . . . . . . . ☞14, 27, 79, 142

L-15 SYNCHRO/ENDING, PAUSE button . . . . . . ☞24, 27, 79, 142

L-16 START/STOP, PLAY/STOP,

DEMO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 24, 79, 142

L-17 ACCOMP ON/OFF, $CHORDS,

PART SELECT, DEMO button . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 24, 26, 143

C-1 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞6

C-2 AUDIO RECORD button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞123

C-3 RECORD button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞68, 72, 73

C-4 SONG SEQUENCER, #EDIT button . . . . . . . . . . . ☞7, 72, 81

C-5 PATTERN SEQUENCER, #EDIT button . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞102

C-6 AUDIO PLAY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞126

C-7 MIXER, #EFFECT button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞31, 37

C-8 TONE EDITOR, #SCALE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞21, 46

C-9 CARD, #LOAD/SAVE button . . . . . . . . . . . ☞7, 137, 138, 140

Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞6, 14, 24

REGISTRATION buttons

C-10 BANK, DELETE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞63, 66, 92, 99

C-11 1, INSERT button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞63, 66, 94, 100

C-12 2, COPY button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞66, 94

C-13 3, QUANTIZE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞66, 95

C-14 4, STEP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞64, 66, 100

C-15 5 button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞66

C-16 6 button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞66

C-17 STORE, #MENU button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞7, 66

TONE buttons

R-1 [A] PIANO, 5 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 63, 94

R-2 [B] E.PIANO, 1 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 63, 94

R-3 [C] ORGAN, 2 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 63, 94, 95

R-4 [D] GUITAR/BASS, • button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 63, 94

R-5 [E] STRINGS, REST button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 100

R-6 [F] BRASS/REED/PIPE button. . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 63, 94, 95

R-7 [G] INDIAN, 6 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 63, 94, 95

R-8 [H] SYNTH, 7 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 63, 94, 95

R-9 [I] OTHERS, 8 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 94, 95

R-10 [J] GM/DRUMS, , button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 94, 95

R-11 [K] USER TONES, . button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 46

R-12 [L] DRAWBAR ORGAN, $MANUAL button . . . . . . . . . ☞50

R-13 FUNCTION button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞130

R-14 NO/–, YES/+, #TRANSPOSE buttons . . . . . . . ☞6, 14, 18, 24

R-15 EXIT button

R-16 ENTER button

R-17 u, t, y, i buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞7

R-18 AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR,

$TYPE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞23, 28

R-19 SPLIT button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞16

R-20 LAYER, $OCTAVE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞16, 18

D-1 ROTARY SLOW/FAST, PART/COMMON button . . . . . . . . . ☞51

D-2 PERCUSSION SECOND, GROUP A/B button . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51

D-3 PERCUSSION THIRD, 1-8/9-16 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51

D-4 16', 1/9/EXT slider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51

D-5 5 1/3', 2/10/DSP slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51

D-6 8', 3/11 slider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51

D-7 4', 4/12 slider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51

D-8 2 2/3', 5/13 slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51

D-9 2', 6/14 slider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51

D-10 1 3/5', 7/15 slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51

D-11 1 1/3', 8/16 slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51

D-12 1', MASTER slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51

S-1 PITCH BEND wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞20

S-2 MODULATION button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞20

T-1 SD CARD SLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞136

T-2 USB jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞145

T-3 SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞11

T-4 INST IN jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞12

T-5 AUDIO IN jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞12

T-6 MIC IN jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞12

T-7 MIC VOLUME knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞12

T-8 LINE OUT R, L/MONO jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞11

T-9 PHONES jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞11

T-10 DC 12V jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞9

CTK7300IN_e.book 5 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

General Guide

E-6

This section explains the contents of the Digital Keyboard’s

display screen.

1Detailed information area

This area displays a variety of information while the Digital

Keyboard is being used. Use this area to confirm proper

operation when changing values, when selecting a menu

item, and when performing other operations.

2Level meter area

This level meter shows the volume level of the notes that

are sounded when you play something on the keyboard or

when Auto Accompaniment is played. There are a total of

32 parts, 16 each in Group A and Group B. The L

indicator will be displayed in the lower left corner while

Group A parts are being indicated by the level meter, while

the M indicator will be displayed in the lower left corner

while Group B parts are being indicated.

For details about parts, see “How Parts are Organized”

(page E-36).

3Indicator areas

The indicator area shows such information as the current

mode (page E-7), the status of settings, the status of Auto

Accompaniment, and other information.

There are two types of indicators: text type indicators such

as :, and pointer (K) type indicators. In the case of

pointer type indicators, a setting or status is indicated by

the location of the K next to fixed text along the sides of the

display. For example, the location of the pointer (K) on the

right side of the display in the sample below indicates

REVERB.

4Registration bank area

This area shows the number of the currently selected

registration bank (page E-66).

5Chord area

This area shows the chord being played when Auto

Accompaniment (page E-24) or music preset (page E-54)

is being used. It also can display fraction chords by

showing the chord root (C, G, etc.) and type (m, 7th, etc.).

6Tempo, measure, beat area

Tempo is shown as the current setting value, as beats per

minute. Auto Accompaniment, the metronome (page

E-19), and other playback is performed at the tempo

shown here. The MEASURE and BEAT values are

counted up as Auto Accompaniment, the metronome, or

other playback progresses.

The item that is currently selected on a display screen is

indicated by thick brackets (%) and by a large dot (0). The

currently selected item is the one that is affected by the R-14

(–, +) buttons or dial operations.

On this screen, “RHYTHM” is selected because it is enclosed

by thick brackets. This indicates that the rhythm setting can be

changed.

On this screen, “Touch” is selected because the 0 is next to

it. This indicates that the value to the right of “Touch”, which is

enclosed in thick brackets, can be changed.

Reading the Display

Currently Selected Item Indication

CTK7300IN_e.book 6 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

General Guide

E-7

Your Digital Keyboard has three modes: a rhythm mode, a

card mode, and a song sequencer mode. The currently

selected mode is shown as an indicator on the display.

•Rhythm mode (: indicator displayed)

Under its initial factory default settings, the Digital Keyboard

enters the rhythm mode whenever it is turned on. The

rhythm mode is the base mode, and it is the mode you

should enter when you want to play on the keyboard or use

Auto Accompaniment.

• Card mode (; indicator displayed)

Enter the card mode when you want to perform memory

card operations. See “Using a Memory Card” (page E-136)

for more information.

– In the rhythm mode, pressing the C-9 (CARD) button will

enter the card mode.

– In the card mode, pressing the C-9 (CARD) button or the

R-15 (EXIT) button will return to the rhythm mode.

• Song sequencer mode (< indicator displayed)

Enter the sequencer mode when you want to record

performances using the keyboard and Auto

Accompaniment, or to play back song data. For details, see

“Using the Song Sequencer” (page E-68).

– In the rhythm mode, pressing the C-4 (SONG

SEQUENCER) button will enter the song sequencer

mode.

– In the song sequencer mode, pressing the C-4 (SONG

SEQUENCER) button or the R-15 (EXIT) button will

return to the rhythm mode.

• After entering any mode besides the rhythm mode and

performing the operations you want, be sure to return

to the rhythm mode.

• Unless otherwise specifically noted, all of the

operations described in this user’s guide are

performed in the rhythm mode.

You can use the same operations to display mode and

function specific menus. To display a menu, hold down the

R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you press the C-17 (MENU)

button. For example, the “Performance” menu shown below

will appear if you perform the above operation while in the

rhythm mode. This menu provides instant access to

performance functions.

• The currently selected item is the one with the 0 next to it.

You can use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 up

and down. You also can use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to

scroll between menu pages.

• To exit a displayed menu, press the R-15 (EXIT) button.

You may need to press the R-15 (EXIT) button more than

once in some cases.

• The menu items and operations for specific modes and

functions are described in each section of this user’s guide.

Never try to perform any operation, or insert or remove a

memory card while the message “Please Wait” is on the

display. Wait until the message disappears.

• “Please Wait” indicates that the Digital Keyboard is

performing a data save operation. Turning off the Digital

Keyboard or removing the memory card can cause Digital

Keyboard data to be deleted or become corrupted. It also

can cause the Digital Keyboard to fail to turn on when the

L-1 (P) button is pressed.

• If this happens, refer to “Troubleshooting” (page E-150).

Modes

C-9 (CARD) button

Rhythm mode

C-4 (SONG

SEQUENCER) button

C-9 (CARD) or

R-15 (EXIT) button

Card mode

Song sequencer mode

C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) or

R-15 (EXIT) button

Menus

, Precautions while “Please

Wait” is displayed

CTK7300IN_e.book 7 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

General Guide

E-8

Your Digital Keyboard is equipped with a song sequencer and

other features that you can use to store data you create. This

stored data is retained even when the Digital Keyboard is

turned off.*

However, the tone, rhythm, and other settings you configure

on the Digital Keyboard’s console normally are returned to

their initial power on defaults whenever you turn off power.

You can configure the Digital Keyboard so it remembers its

latest setup or to apply a predetermined default setup each

time you turn it on. For details, see “AutoResume (Auto

Resume)” (page E-134) and “Default (Default Settings)” (page

E-134).

*The following data and settings are always retained even

when power is turned off.

– Registration setup data (page E-66)

– Song sequencer data (page E-68)

– User rhythm data (page E-103)

– User preset data (page E-58)

– User tone data (page E-44)

– User drawbar organ tone data (page E-50)

– User DSP data (page E-33)

– LCD Contrast setting (page E-134)

– Auto Resume setting (page E-134)

You can delete all data in keyboard memory and return all

keyboard parameters to their initial factory default settings.

For details, see “To initialize all data and settings (or

parameter settings only)” (page E-135).

Saving Settings

Returning the Digital Keyboard to

Its Factory Default Settings

CTK7300IN_e.book 8 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-9

Getting Ready to Play

Prepare a household power outlet or batteries.

• Be sure to comply with the separate “Safety

Precautions”. Incorrect use of this product creates the

risk of electric shock and fire.

• Always make sure that the product is turned off before

plugging in or unplugging the AC adaptor, or before

loading or removing batteries.

Make sure that you use only the AC adaptor (JEITA Standard,

with unified polarity plug) specified for this product. Use of a

different type of AC adaptor can cause malfunction.

Specified AC Adaptor: AD-A12150LW

Use the supplied power cord to connect the AC adaptor as

shown in the illustration below.

• The shape of the power cord plug and household

power outlet receptacle differ according to country and

geographical area. The illustration shows just one

example of the shapes that are available.

• The AC adaptor will become warm to the touch after

very long use. This is normal and does not indicate

malfunction.

• To prevent breaking of the wire, take care to avoid

putting any type of load on the power cord.

• Never insert metal, pencils, or any other objects into

the product’s DC 12V jack. Doing so creates the risk of

accident.

Preparing the Music Stand

Power Supply

Music stand

Using a Household Power Outlet

No bending! No winding!

Household power outlet

AC adaptor

• Configuration and type depends on your

geographic location.

T-10 (DC 12V) jack

Power cord

CTK7300IN_e.book 9 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Getting Ready to Play

E-10

You can use six D-size batteries for power.

• Use alkaline or zinc-carbon batteries.

Never use oxyride or any other nickel based batteries.

Open the battery cover on the bottom of the

Digital Keyboard.

Load six D-size batteries into the battery

compartment.

• Make sure the positive + and negative - ends of the

batteries are facing as shown in the illustration.

Insert the tabs of the battery cover into the

holes on the side of the battery compartment,

and close the cover.

■Low Battery Indication

The following shows the approximate battery life.

4 hours* on alkaline batteries

*The above values are standard battery life at normal

temperature, with the volume at medium setting.

Temperature extremes or playing at very loud volume

settings can shorten battery life.

The indicators shown below start to flash to let you know

when battery power is low. Replace the batteries with new

ones.

Using Batteries

Tabs

Low battery indication (flashing)

CTK7300IN_e.book 10 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-11

Connections

Using headphones cuts off output from the built-in speakers,

which means you can practice playing even late at night

without disturbing others.

• Be sure to turn down the volume level before connecting

headphones.

• Headphones do not come with the Digital Keyboard.

• Use commercially available headphones.

• Do not listen to very high volume output over

headphones for long periods. Doing so creates the risk

of hearing damage.

• If you are using headphones that require an adaptor

plug, make sure you do not leave the adaptor plugged

in when removing the headphones.

Connecting an optionally available pedal let’s you perform

pedal operations that add more versatility to your keyboard

play. For information about the types of effects that can be

applied by pressing the pedal, see “Ped.Setting (Pedal

Setting)” (page E-132).

You can connect audio equipment or a music amplifier to the

Digital Keyboard and then play through external speakers for

more powerful volume and better sound quality.

• Whenever connecting a device to the Digital Keyboard,

first use the L-2 (VOLUME) knob to set the volume to a

low level. After connecting, you can adjust the volume

to the level you want.

• Whenever you connect any device to the Digital

Keyboard, be sure to read the user documentation that

comes with the device.

Use commercially available connecting cords to connect the

external audio equipment to the Digital Keyboard’s T-8 (LINE

OUT) jacks as shown in Figure 1. LINE OUT R jack output is

right channel sound, while LINE OUT L/MONO jack output is

left channel sound. It is up to you to purchase connecting

cords like the ones shown in the illustration for connection of

audio equipment. Normally in this configuration you must set

the audio equipment’s input selector to the setting that

specifies the terminal (such as AUX IN) to which the Digital

Keyboard is connected. Use the L-2 (VOLUME) knob to

adjust the volume level.

Use a commercially available connecting cord to connect the

amplifier to either of the Digital Keyboard’s T-8 (LINE OUT)

jacks as shown in Figure 2. LINE OUT R jack output is right

channel sound, while LINE OUT L/MONO jack output is left

channel sound. Connecting to the LINE OUT L/MONO jack

only outputs a mixture of both channels. It is up to you to

purchase a connecting cord like the one shown in the

illustration for connection of the amplifier. Use the L-2

(VOLUME) knob to adjust the volume level.

Connecting Headphones

Connecting a Pedal

T-9 (PHONES) jack

T-3 (SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK)

Outputting Digital Keyboard

Sound to Audio Equipment or an

Amplifier

Outputting Keyboard Notes to Audio

Equipment 1

Outputting Keyboard Notes to a Musical

Instrument Amplifier 2

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

Audio amplifier AUX IN jack, etc.

Pin plug

LEFT (White)

Standard plug

Guitar amplifier

Keyboard amplifier, etc.

RIGHT (Red)

CTK7300IN_e.book 11 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Connections

E-12

You can use the Digital Keyboard’s speakers to output sound

from a CD player, another digital keyboard, or other external

device, or from a microphone.

• Whenever connecting something to the Digital

Keyboard, first use the L-2 (VOLUME) knob to set the

volume to a low level. After connecting, you can adjust

the volume to the level you want.

• Whenever you connect any device to the Digital

Keyboard, be sure to read the user documentation that

comes with the device.

• Digital Keyboard built-in effects (reverb, chorus, DSP) are

not applied to input from the T-5 (AUDIO IN) jack. Input is

output directly, and is affected by the Digital Keyboard’s

build-in amplifier and L-2 (VOLUME) knob.

• Digital Keyboard built-in effects (reverb, chorus, DSP) are

applied to input from the T-4 (INST IN) and T-6 (MIC IN)

jacks. You also can use the Mixer to adjust how effects are

applied, the speaker stereo pan position, and other

parameters.

For details, see “Applying Effects to a Sound” (page E-29)

and “Using the Mixer” (page E-36).

Use a commercially available connecting cord to connect the

external device to the Digital Keyboard’s T-5 (AUDIO IN) jack.

The connecting cord should have a stereo mini plug on one

end and a plug that is compatible with the external device you

are connecting to on the other end. Adjust volume using the

Digital Keyboard’s L-2 (VOLUME) knob.

Use a commercially available connecting cord to connect the

external device to the Digital Keyboard’s T-4 (INST IN) jack.

The connecting cord should have a standard plug (monaural)

on one end and a plug that is compatible with the external

device you are connecting to on the other end. Adjust volume

using the Digital Keyboard’s L-2 (VOLUME) knob.

You can connect a dynamic microphone (only) to the Digital

Keyboard for output thorough the Digital Keyboard’s

speakers.

• You can adjust the volume level of microphone input with

the T-7 (MIC VOLUME) knob. Microphone volume control

is independent of overall keyboard volume.

• Before connecting a microphone, make sure that the

Digital Keyboard and microphone are turned off.

• Before connecting a microphone, set both the L-2

(VOLUME) and T-7 (MIC VOLUME) knobs to low levels.

Adjust volume settings to appropriate levels after

connecting the microphone.

Use of unauthorized accessories creates the risk of fire,

electric shock, and personal injury.

• You can get information about accessories that are sold

separately for this product from the CASIO catalog

available from your retailer, and from the CASIO website at

the following URL.

http://world.casio.com/

Outputting Input from an External

Device or a Microphone through

the Digital Keyboard’s Speakers

Output of External Device Input that is Not

Affected by the Digital Keyboard’s Effects

Stereo mini plug

CD player,

Portable audio player, etc.

Output of External Device Input that is

Affected by the Digital Keyboard’s Effects

Outputting Sound with a Microphone

Bundled and Optional

Accessories

Standard plug (monaural)

CD player,

Portable audio player, etc.

T-6 (MIC IN) jack

CTK7300IN_e.book 12 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-13

Selecting and Playing a Tone

Rotate the L-2 (VOLUME) knob towards MIN to

set the volume to a low level.

Referring to “Connections” (page E-11),

connect headphones, amplifier, or other device.

Use the L-1 (P) button to turn on power.

• To turn off the Digital Keyboard, press the L-1 (P)

button again.

• Pressing the L-1 (P) button to turn off power actually puts

the Digital Keyboard into a standby state. Minute amounts

of current continue to flow within the Digital Keyboard in the

standby state. If you do not plan to use the Digital Keyboard

for a long time or if there is a lightning storm in your area,

be sure to unplug the AC adaptor from the power outlet.

• If you press the L-1 (P) button only lightly, the display

will light up momentarily but power will not turn on.

This does not indicate malfunction. Press the L-1 (P)

button firmly and completely to turn on power.

• Under its initial configuration, the Digital Keyboard will

return to its default settings whenever you turn it off.

You can change the initial configuration to have the

Digital Keyboard remember its latest setup or to apply

a predetermined setup each time you turn it on. For

details, see “AutoResume (Auto Resume)” (page

E-134) and “Default (Default Settings)” (page E-134).

• The message “Please Wait” will remain on the display

while a data save operation is in progress. Do not

perform any other operation while it is displayed.

Turning off the Digital Keyboard or removing the

memory card can cause Digital Keyboard data to be

deleted or become corrupted. It also can cause the

Digital Keyboard to fail to turn on when the L-1 (P)

button is pressed. If this happens, refer to

“Troubleshooting” (page E-150).

This Digital Keyboard is designed to turn off automatically to

avoid wasting power after no operation is performed for a

preset amount of time. The Auto Power Off trigger time is six

minutes under battery power and four hours under AC

adaptor power.

• Auto Power Off is enabled while “on” is selected for

“AutoPower (Auto Power Off)” (page E-134). The initial

default setting is “on”. To disable Auto Power Off, select

“oFF” for “AutoPower” (Auto Power Off).

• You also can use the procedure below to temporarily

suspend Auto Power Off while it is enabled.

L-3L-3

L-2L-2

L-1L-1

R-19R-19

R-20R-20

L-16L-16

L-17L-17

L-14L-14

L-13L-13

R-14R-14

R-1

R-12R-1

R-12

To turn on Digital Keyboard power

Auto Power Off

CTK7300IN_e.book 13 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Selecting and Playing a Tone

E-14

■To disable Auto Power Off

While the Digital Keyboard is turned on, press

the L-1 (P) button to turn it off.

While holding down the L-3 ([A] POPS/ROCK/

DANCE) button, press the L-1 (P) button to

turn on the Digital Keyboard.

• Auto Power Off will be disabled at this time.

• Turning off the keyboard after performing the above steps

will re-enable Auto Power Off.

While holding down the L-17 (ACCOMP ON/

OFF) button, press the L-16 (PLAY/STOP)

button.

• This starts demo tune play.

• The Digital Keyboard has a total of five demo tunes.

You also can use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a

demo tune.

• Pressing the L-14 (dFF) button performs fast forward

play of the demo tune, while the L-13 (sREW) button

performs fast backward play. Holding down the L-13

(sREW) button until playback reaches the beginning

of the current song will stop playback there. Normal

playback will resume when you release the L-13

(sREW) button. Holding down the L-14 (dFF)

button continues fast forward playback, even after the

end of a song is reached.

• You can play along on the keyboard with demo tune

play. Note, however, that you cannot change the tone

assigned to the keyboard. Only the key operations

described above are supported during demo tune

playback.

To stop demo tune playback, press the L-16

(PLAY/STOP) button.

The tones of this Digital Keyboard are divided among groups,

each of which corresponds to one of the 12 TONE buttons.

You can specify a tone by its group and its tone number.

Use the following procedure to select a single tone that is

applied across the entire keyboard.

Refer to the separate “Appendix” to look up the

group and the number of the tone you want to

select.

Check to make sure that the @ and A

indicators are not on the display.

• If they are displayed, press the R-19 (SPLIT) button

and/or R-20 (LAYER) button to clear both indicators

from the display.

Use buttons R-1 ([A] PIANO) through R-11 ([K]

USER TONES) to select a tone group.

• The R-11 ([K] USER TONES) button selects the user

tone group. For details, see “Using the Tone Editor”

(page E-44).

• The R-12 ([L] DRAWBAR ORGAN) button selects the

drawbar organ tone group. See “Using Drawbar Organ

Tones” (page E-50) for more information.

Use the dial to scroll through the tone numbers

until the one you want is displayed.

Example: Group [C], Number 004

Listening to Demo Tunes

Selecting a Tone

To select a tone

Tone name Group

Number

CTK7300IN_e.book 14 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Selecting and Playing a Tone

E-15

Now you can play on the keyboard using the

tone you selected.

• You also can use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a tone.

Holding down either button will scroll through tone numbers

at high speed. Pressing both of the R-14 (–, +) buttons at

the same time will select tone 001 in the currently selected

group.

You can configure the keyboard to play two different tones at

the same time (Layer) or to play different tones in the left and

right ranges (Split). You can even use Layer and Split in

combination with each other and play three different tones at

the same time.

The UPPER 1 part is used alone when playing an individual

tone on the keyboard. When layering two tones, the UPPER 1

part and UPPER 2 parts are used. When splitting the

keyboard between two tones, the low range of the keyboard

plays the LOWER part.

• One tone across the entire keyboard (page E-14)

This configuration uses the UPPER 1 part only (Layer: Off,

Split: Off).

• Two layered tones across the entire keyboard (page

E-16)

This configuration uses the UPPER 1 part and UPPER 2

part (Layer: On, Split: Off).

• Two tones, one for the left range and one for the right

range of the keyboard (page E-17)

This configuration uses the UPPER 1 part and LOWER part

(Layer: Off, Split: On).

• Three tones, two layered tones for the right range and

one tone for the left range of the keyboard (page E-17)

This configuration uses the UPPER 1 part, UPPER 2 part,

and LOWER part (Layer: On, Split: On).

• You can configure the settings described below to adjust

each part when using multiple tones in layer and split

configurations.

Layering and Splitting Tones

UPPER 1

UPPER 2

LOWER UPPER 1

To adjust this setting for

each part:

Go here for more

information:

Octave shift Using Octave Shift

(page E-18)

Volume balance Using the Mixer (page E-36)

Stereo position, effect

(reverb, chorus) levels, and

other detailed settings

LOWER UPPER 1

UPPER 2

CTK7300IN_e.book 15 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Selecting and Playing a Tone

E-16

Refer to the separate “Appendix” to look up the

group(s) and numbers of the two tones

(UPPER 1 part tone and UPPER 2 part tone) you

want to use.

Check to make sure that the @ and A

indicators are not on the display.

• If they are displayed, press the R-19 (SPLIT) button

and/or R-20 (LAYER) button to clear both indicators

from the display. When neither indicator is displayed,

the tone you select will become the UPPER 1 part tone.

Use the TONE buttons and dial to select the

UPPER 1 part tone.

Press the R-20 (LAYER) button.

• This causes the A indicator to appear on the

display. This indicates that the tone you select will

become the UPPER 2 part tone.

Use the TONE buttons and dial to select the

UPPER 2 part tone.

Play something on the keyboard to check how

the tones sound layered together.

To cancel tone layering, press the R-20 (LAYER)

button again so the A indicator disappears

from the display.

Refer to the separate “Appendix” to look up the

group(s) and numbers of the tones (UPPER 1

part tone and LOWER part tone) you want to

use.

Check to make sure that the @ and A

indicators are not on the display.

• If they are displayed, press the R-19 (SPLIT) button

and/or R-20 (LAYER) button to clear both indicators

from the display. When neither indicator is displayed,

the tone you select will become the UPPER 1 part tone.

Use the TONE buttons and dial to select the

UPPER 1 part tone.

Press the R-19 (SPLIT) button.

• This causes the @ indicator to appear on the

display. This indicates that the tone you select will

become the LOWER part tone.

Use the TONE buttons and dial to select the

LOWER part tone.

Play something on the left and right sides of the

keyboard to confirm that the tones are assigned

properly.

• You also can specify the keyboard split point, which is

the location where the keyboard splits between the left

range and right range. For details, see “To specify the

keyboard split point” (page E-17).

To cancel keyboard split, press the R-19 (SPLIT)

button so the @ indicator disappears from

the display.

C-8C-8

R-15R-15

R-17R-17

R-13R-13

R-16R-16

R-18R-18

R-19R-19

R-20R-20

R-14R-14

L-10L-10

L-9L-9

L-11L-11

To layer two tones To split the keyboard between two tones

CTK7300IN_e.book 16 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Selecting and Playing a Tone

E-17

While holding down the R-19 (SPLIT) button,

press the keyboard key that you want to be the

leftmost key in the right side (UPPER 1 part)

range.

• The name of the key you press will appear on the

display as the new split point key name.

• You also can use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

displayed split point key name.

When you are finished, release the R-19 (SPLIT)

button.

• The initial default split point is at key F#3.

• During Auto Accompaniment play (page E-24), the

keyboard to the left of the split point becomes the chord

keyboard.

Perform steps 1 through 6 of the procedure

under “To layer two tones” (page E-16).

Refer to the separate “Appendix” to look up the

group and the number of the tone you want to

assign to for the LOWER part.

Press the R-19 (SPLIT) button.

• This causes the @ indicator to appear on the

display. This indicates that the tone you select will

become the LOWER part tone.

Use the TONE buttons and dial to select the

LOWER part tone.

Play something on the left and right sides of the

keyboard to confirm that the tones are assigned

properly.

• The right keyboard area plays the UPPER 1 and

UPPER 2 tones in a layered configuration, while the left

keyboard area plays the LOWER tone.

To cancel keyboard split, press the R-19 (SPLIT)

button so the @ indicator disappears from

the display.

To cancel tone layering, press the R-20 (LAYER)

button again so the A indicator disappears

from the display.

To specify the keyboard split point

LOWER part

Key you press

UPPER 1 part

Split point

To use layer and split together

CTK7300IN_e.book 17 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Selecting and Playing a Tone

E-18

The transpose feature lets you raise or lower the overall

tuning of the keyboard in semitone steps. You can use this

feature to adjust keyboard tuning to a key that better matches

a vocalist, another musical instrument, etc.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press one of the R-14 (–, +) buttons.

• This displays the transpose screen shown below.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to

change the setting value.

• You can change the tuning of the keyboard within the

range of –12 to 00 to +12.

Press the R-13 (FUNCTION) button.

• This exits the transpose screen.

• Setting a transposed value other than 00 will cause the

B indicator to appear on the display.

• The current transpose setting is applied to the notes of all

parts (UPPER 1,

UPPER 2

LOWER

, Auto Accompaniment,

etc.) played on the keyboard. The MIDI out note number

when a keyboard key is pressed is also shifted in

accordance with the transpose setting.

You can use octave shift to individually change the octave of

the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and LOWER parts. You can use

octave shift to raise or lower the octave of a song, to assign

different octaves to the left side and right side keyboards while

the keyboard is split, or to play two notes in different octaves

while the keyboard is layered.

Hold down the R-20 (OCTAVE) button until the

octave shift screen shown below appears on

the display.

• This indicates you can change the UPPER 1 part

octave.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the

octave shift amount.

• You can shift the octave within the range of –2 to 0 to

+2.

If you want to change the octave of the

UPPER 2 part, press the R-20 (OCTAVE) button.

• This will cause “UPPER 2” to appear on the display,

indicating that you can change the UPPER 2 part

octave. Perform the same operation as in step 2 to

specify the octave shift amount.

If you want to change the octave of the LOWER

part, press the R-20 (OCTAVE) button.

• This will cause “LOWER” to appear on the display,

indicating that you can change the LOWER part octave.

Perform the same operation as in step 2 to specify the

octave shift amount.

Press the R-20 (OCTAVE) button or the R-15

(EXIT) button.

• This exits the octave shift screen.

Raising and Lowering Keyboard

Tuning (Transpose)

Using Octave Shift

Part name

Octave shift amount (Octave unit)

CTK7300IN_e.book 18 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Selecting and Playing a Tone

E-19

Press the L-9 (METRONOME) button.

• This will start the metronome.

• The display will show the tempo along with a count of

the measures and beats since you started the

metronome.

Press the L-9 (METRONOME) button again to

stop the metronome.

Hold down the L-9 (BEAT) button until the

metronome beat screen shown below appears

on the display.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a

beat setting.

• You can select 0, or a value within the range of 2 to 6.

Specifying 0 for this setting will cause each beat to be

indicated by the same sound (no chime at the

beginning of each measure).

Press the L-9 (BEAT) or R-15 (EXIT) button.

• This exits the metronome beat screen.

There are two different methods you can use to change the

tempo setting: using the TEMPO buttons or tapping a beat

with a button.

■To change the tempo using the TEMPO buttons

Press the L-10 (TEMPO w) (slower) or L-11

(TEMPO q) (faster) button.

• This displays the tempo screen shown below.

• If you do not perform any operation for a few seconds,

the display will return to previous screen automatically.

Use the L-10 (TEMPO w) and L-11 (TEMPO q)

buttons to change the tempo (beats per

minute).

• Holding down either button will scroll the setting values

at high speed.

• You can specify a tempo value in the range of 30 to

255.

Press the R-15 (EXIT) button.

• This exits the tempo screen.

Using the Metronome

To change the beats per measure

Tempo

Measure

Beat

To change the tempo setting

CTK7300IN_e.book 19 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Selecting and Playing a Tone

E-20

■To adjust the tempo by tapping a beat

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, tap the L-11 (TAP) button four times at

the speed (tempo) you want to set.

• The first tap of the L-11 (TAP) button will cause the

display shown below to appear.

• The tempo setting will change in accordance with your

tapping speed as soon as you tap the fourth time.

• The setting will be canceled if you release the R-13

(FUNCTION) button before tapping the L-11 (TAP)

button four times.

After setting the tempo by tapping, you then

can use the procedure under “To change the

tempo using the TEMPO buttons” (page E-19) to

make fine adjustments.

The PITCH BEND wheel (S-1) lets you change the pitch of

notes you are playing by rotating the wheel forward or back.

Rotating the wheel away from you raises the pitch, while

rotating it towards you lowers it. Releasing the wheel causes

the pitch of the notes to return to normal automatically.

• Do not have the pitch bend wheel rotated as you turn

on the keyboard.

• You also can change the range of the pitch bend wheel

(bend range) globally or for a specific part. For details, see

“BendRange (Bend Range)” (page E-132) and “Part

Parameters” (page E-43).

You can apply vibrato to notes you play on the keyboard (all

UPPER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER part notes) by hand. Vibrato is

applied to notes while the S-2 (MODULATION) button is

depressed. Releasing the button stops application of vibrato

(under initial default settings).

• Instead of vibrato, you can assign a different DSP effect to

the S-2 (MODULATION) button, if you want. For details,

see information about the following parameters in “DSP

Parameter Settings” (page E-35) and “Tone Parameter

Settings” (page E-48).

– Mod Button Assign (Modulation Button Assign)

– Mod Button On Value (Modulation Button On Value)

– Mod Button Off Value (Modulation Button Off Value)

Using the Pitch Bend Wheel

Applying Vibrato to Notes

CTK7300IN_e.book 20 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Selecting and Playing a Tone

E-21

Use the scale function to select one of the 17 preset

temperaments (tunings) for the built-in sound source. You

also can fine tune each note of a scale (from C to B) in

one-cent units. After selecting one of the preset

temperaments, you can edit it to suit your particular needs.

You also can specify whether the current scale settings

(temperament setting and fine tuning adjustment) should be

applied to Auto Accompaniment (Accomp Scale).

• The settings you configure with the scale function are

retained even when the Digital Keyboard is turned off.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-8 (SCALE) button to display

the scale screen, with the 0 located at

“Preset”.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This displays a preset temperament selection screen

like the one shown below.

Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a

temperament.

• Selecting a temperament other than 01: Equal will

cause the C indicator to appear on the display.

• The following shows the temperament numbers and

names that appear on the display.

Perform the following steps to specify the root

note of a temperament.

Selecting a Temperament and

Fine Tuning Its Scale

To select a preset scale

Number Screen Name Preset Temperament

01 Equal Equal temperament

02 Pure Major Just major intonation

03 Pure Minor Just minor intonation

04 Pythagorean Pythagorean system

05 Kirnberger 3 Kirnberger III

06 Werckmeister Werckmeister 1-3 (III)

07 Mean-Tone Mean tone

08 Rast Rast

09 Bayati Bayati

10 Hijaz Hijaz

11 Saba Saba

12 Dashti Dashti

13 Chahargah Chahargah

14 Segah Segah

15 Gurjari Todi Gurjari Todi

16 Chandrakauns Chandrakauns

17 Charukeshi Charukeshi

(1) Press the R-17 (i) button.

• This displays root note setting screen.

(2) Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

root note (C to B).

• You can also use the keyboard to specify the root

note.

CTK7300IN_e.book 21 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Selecting and Playing a Tone

E-22

When you are finished, press the R-15 (EXIT)

button twice.

• This will return to the screen that was displayed before

you displayed the scale screen.

• The root note setting you specify here is retained, even if

you later change to a different preset temperament.

If required, perform the procedure under “To

select a preset scale” (page E-21) to select a

preset temperament.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-8 (SCALE) button to display

the scale screen.

Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to

“FineTune” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the scale fine tuning screen like the one

shown below.

You can adjust the tuning of each individual

note in the scale.

When you are finished making adjustments,

press the R-15 (EXIT) button twice.

• This will return to the screen that was displayed before

you displayed the scale screen.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-8 (SCALE) button to display

the scale screen.

Use the R-17 (i) button to move the 0 to

“AcmpScale”.

Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to change

the setting value.

When the setting is the way you want, press the

R-15 (EXIT) button.

• This will return to the screen that was displayed before

you displayed the scale screen.

• The above scale on/off setting affects the Auto

Accompaniment bass part and Chord 1 through Chord 5

parts (A11 through A16). You also can turn scales settings

on or off for each individual part using the Part Parameter

(page E-43) “Scale (Part Scale Enable)” setting.

Fine Tuning a Scale

(1) Use the R-17 (t) button to move the 0 to “Note”, and

then use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select the

name of the note you want to fine tune.

• You can also press a keyboard key to specify a

note.

(2) Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to “Cent”, and

then use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to fine tune the

selected note. You can fine tune a note within the

range of –99 through +99 cents.

• Adjusting all of the notes in the scale to 0 changes

the selected tuning to equal temperament. The

C indicator will be on the display when any note

in the scale has a value other than 0.

Specifying whether the Current Scale

Settings Should be Applied to Auto

Accompaniment (Accomp Scale)

To do this: Select this setting:

Not apply scale settings to Auto

Accompaniment

oFF

Apply scale settings to Auto

Accompaniment

CTK7300IN_e.book 22 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Selecting and Playing a Tone

E-23

With the arpeggiator, you can play various arpeggios and

other phrases automatically by simply pressing keys on the

keyboard. You can select from a number of different

arpeggiator options, including playing arpeggios from a chord,

playing various phrases automatically, and more.

Hold down the R-18 (AUTO HARMONIZE/

ARPEGGIATOR) button until the type selection

screen shown below appears on the display.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select the

arpeggiator type you want to use.

• You can select one of the arpeggiator types (013

through 162). Refer to the separate “Appendix” for

detailed information about supported arpeggiator types.

• When selecting the arpeggiator type, you can assign

the recommended tone for the currently displayed type

as the keyboard tone, by holding down the R-18 (AUTO

HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR) button until a pointer

indicator starts to flash on the display next to ARPEG.

• For information about type number 001 through 012,

see “Using Auto Harmonize” (page E-28).

Press the R-15 (EXIT) button.

• This exits the type selection screen.

Press the R-18 (AUTO HARMONIZE/

ARPEGGIATOR) button.

• This causes a pointer indicator to appear on the display

next to ARPEG.

Configure arpeggiator settings as required.

• The settings you can configure are described in the

table below. For information about how to configure

settings, see “To change the setting of a function menu

item” (page E-130).

On the keyboard, play a chord or a single note.

• Arpeggio is played in accordance with the currently

selected arpeggiator type and the note(s) you play.

To turn off the arpeggiator, press the R-18

(AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR) button

again.

• This causes the pointer indicator next to ARPEG. to

disappear from the display.

Playing Arpeggio Phrases

Automatically (Arpeggiator)

Type number Type name

Flashing

For information about this setting: Go here:

Whether arpeggio should be played

while keyboard keys are depressed or

after the keys are released

ArpegHold

(Arpeggiator Hold)

(page E-132)

The number of times arpeggio is

played within one beat

ArpegSpeed

(Arpeggiator

Speed) (page

E-132)

When the keyboard is split between

two tones, whether arpeggio should

be played when UPPER keyboard or

LOWER keyboard keys are pressed

ArpegPart

(Arpeggiator Part)

(page E-132)

Lit

CTK7300IN_e.book 23 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-24

Using Auto Accompaniment

With Auto Accompaniment, simply select the accompaniment

rhythm you want and the matching accompaniment (drums,

guitar, etc.) will play automatically when you play a chord with

your left hand. It’s like having your own personal backup

group along with you wherever you go.

This Digital Keyboard has 275 built-in Auto Accompaniment

patterns, which are divided into five groups. You can edit

built-in rhythms to create your own original rhythms (called

“user rhythms”), which you can save in a sixth group. For

more information, see the separate “Appendix”.

Refer to the separate “Appendix” to look up the

group and the number of the rhythm you want

to use.

Use the buttons from L-3 ([A] POPS/ROCK/

DANCE) to L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS) to select a

rhythm group.

• The L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS) button is for the user

rhythm group. For details, see “Using the Pattern

Sequencer” (page E-102).

Use the dial to scroll through the rhythm

numbers until the one you want is displayed.

Example: Group B, Number 005

• You can also use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a

rhythm number. Holding down either button will scroll

through rhythm numbers at high speed. Pressing both

of the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time will select

001 in the currently selected group.

Use the L-10 (TEMPO w) and L-11 (TEMPO q)

buttons to adjust the tempo setting.

Press the L-17 (ACCOMP ON/OFF) button so the

D indicator is on the display.

• Each press of the button toggles accompaniment

between on (D indicator displayed) and off

(indicator not displayed).

• All accompaniment instrument parts sound while

accompaniment is on (D indicator displayed),

while only percussion instrument parts (drums, etc.)

sound while accompaniment is off (indicator not

displayed).

R-15R-15

R-18R-18

L-12L-12

L-15L-15

L-10L-10 L-11L-11

L-16L-16

L-17L-17

L-14L-14

L-13L-13

R-14R-14

L-3

L-8L-3

L-8

Playing an Auto Accompaniment

Rhythm name Group

Number

CTK7300IN_e.book 24 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using Auto Accompaniment

E-25

Press the L-15 (SYNCHRO/ENDING) button.

• This enters synchro standby (Auto Accompaniment

waiting for you to play a chord), with the F

indicator flashing on the display. The flashing F

indicator means that the normal Auto Accompaniment

pattern is standing by.

You also can use the buttons described below

to change to intro or variation pattern standby.

For details about intro and variation patterns, see “Modifying

Auto Accompaniment Patterns” (page E-27).

Play the chord you want on the chord keyboard

(left keyboard keys).

• Auto Accompaniment will start playing when you play

the chord.

• To start percussion part play without playing a chord,

press the L-16 (START/STOP) button.

Example: To play a C chord

• The chord root and type that corresponds to the keys

you press appear in the chord area of the display.

Play other chords with your left hand as you

play the melody with your right hand.

• You can use “CASIO Chord” or other simplified chord

fingering modes to play chords. For details, see

“Selecting a Chord Fingering Mode” in the following

section.

• You can use the L-13 (NORMAL/FILL-IN) and L-14

(VARIATION/FILL-IN) buttons to modify

accompaniment patterns. For details, see “Modifying

Auto Accompaniment Patterns” (page E-27).

10.

When you are finished, press the L-16 (START/

STOP) button again to stop Auto

Accompaniment.

• Pressing the L-15 (SYNCHRO/ENDING) button instead

of the L-16 (START/STOP) button will play an ending

pattern before stopping Auto Accompaniment play. For

details about ending patterns, see “Modifying Auto

Accompaniment Patterns” (page E-27).

• You can use the following procedure to adjust the volume

level of the Auto Accompaniment, without affecting the

volume of Digital Keyboard output. For details, see

“AccompVol. (Auto Accompaniment Volume)” (page

E-133).

• You can change the size of the chord keyboard by using

the split feature to move the split point (page E-17). The

keyboard keys to the left of the split point make up the

chord keyboard.

To enter synchro

standby for this

pattern:

Press this button: Display

Indicator:

Intro L-12 (INTRO) E

flashing

Variation L-14 (VARIATION/

FILL-IN)

flashing

Chord keyboard

Melody keyboard

CTK7300IN_e.book 25 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using Auto Accompaniment

E-26

While Auto Accompaniment is playing, you use the chord

keyboard to specify the chord root and type. The area of the

keyboard to the left of the split point (page E-17) is the chord

keyboard.

You can select from among the following five chord fingering

modes.

1: Fingered 1

2: Fingered 2

3: Fingered 3

4: CASIO Chord

5: Full Range

Hold down the L-17 (ACCOMP ON/OFF) button

until the chord fingering mode selection screen

shown below appears on the display.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a

chord fingering mode.

Press the L-17 (ACCOMP ON/OFF) button or the

R-15 (EXIT) button.

• This exits the chord fingering mode selection screen.

■Fingered 1, 2, 3

With these three chord fingering modes, you play chords on

the chord keyboard using their normal chord fingerings. Some

chord forms are abbreviated, and can be fingered with one or

two keys. For information about the types of chords you can

finger and their fingerings, see the “Fingering Guide” (page

E-160).

■CASIO Chord

With “CASIO Chord”, you can use simplified fingerings to play

the four types of chords described below.

When pressing more than one chord keyboard key, it makes

no difference whether the additional keys are white or black.

■Full Range Chord

With this chord fingering mode, you can use the full range of

the keyboard to play chords and the melody. For information

about the types of chords you can finger and their fingerings,

see the “Fingering Guide” (page E-160).

Selecting a Chord Fingering Mode

To select a chord fingering mode

Fingered 1: Play the component notes of the chord on the

keyboard.

Fingered 2: Unlike Fingered 1, 6th input is not possible with

this mode.

Fingered 3: Unlike Fingered 1, this mode allows input of

fraction chords with the lowest keyboard note as

the bass note.

Chord keyboard

Melody Keyboard

Chord fingering mode

Chord Type Example

Major Chords

Press one key, whose note

corresponds to the chord

name.

• To play C Major, press any

C key in the chord keyboard.

The octave of the note does

not matter.

C (C Major)

Minor Chords

Press the chord keyboard key

that corresponds to the major

chord, while also pressing one

other chord keyboard key to

the right.

Cm (C minor)

Seventh Chords

Press the chord keyboard key

that corresponds to the major

chord, while also pressing two

other chord keyboard keys to

the right.

C7 (C seventh)

Minor Seventh Chords

Press the chord keyboard key

that corresponds to the major

chord, while also pressing

three other chord keyboard

keys to the right.

Cm7 (C minor seventh)

CCDE F

Note

name

CCDE F

CTK7300IN_e.book 26 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using Auto Accompaniment

E-27

There are six different Auto Accompaniment patterns, shown

below. You can switch between patterns during

accompaniment play and even modify patterns. Use buttons

L-12 through L-15 to select the pattern you want.

One-Touch Preset gives you one-touch access to tone and

tempo settings that go well with the currently selected Auto

Accompaniment rhythm pattern.

If rhythm is playing, press the L-16 (START/

STOP) button to stop it.

Select the rhythm (excluding user rhythms) you

want to use.

While holding down the L-7 ([E] PIANO

RHYTHMS) button, press the L-8 ([F] USER

RHYTHMS) button.

• Settings for the following items are configured

appropriately for the rhythm you selected in step 2.

• Also, the F indicator flashes on the display to

indicate that the normal Auto Accompaniment pattern is

standing by.

Start playing something on the keyboard.

• Perform the procedure starting from step 7 under

“Playing an Auto Accompaniment” (page E-24).

• One-Touch Presets are not supported for user rhythms

(F:001 through F:100).

• You can recall one-touch preset settings even if a rhythm is

already playing when you perform step 3 of the above

procedure. In this case, rhythm play will continue without

going into synchro standby.

Modifying Auto Accompaniment

Patterns

*1 Press at the beginning of a song. Accompaniment play

proceeds with the normal pattern after the intro pattern is

complete. Pressing the L-14 (VARIATION/FILL-IN) button

before pressing this button will proceed with the variation

pattern after the intro pattern is complete.

*2 Press while a normal pattern is playing to insert a fill-in

pattern.

*3 Press while a variation pattern is playing to insert a fill-in

variation pattern.

*4 Press at the end of a song. This will play an ending pattern

and then stop Auto Accompaniment.

L-12L-12 L-13L-13 L-14L-14 L-15L-15

Intro *1Normal Variation Ending *4

Normal fill-in

Variation fill-in

Using One-Touch Presets

To perform using a one-touch preset

– Tones for the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and LOWER

parts

– Octave shift for the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and

LOWER parts

– Layer and split on/off

– Accompaniment on/off

– Reverb on/off and type

– Chorus type

– Auto harmonize or Arpeggiator on/off and type

– Tempo

CTK7300IN_e.book 27 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using Auto Accompaniment

E-28

Auto harmonize lets you add harmony to melody notes you

play with your right hand. You can select any one of 12 Auto

harmonize settings.

Hold down the R-18 (AUTO HARMONIZE/

ARPEGGIATOR) button until the type selection

screen shown below appears on the display.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select the

auto harmonize type you want to use.

• You can select one of the type numbers (001 through

012) described in the table below.

• For information about type numbers greater than 012,

see “Playing Arpeggio Phrases Automatically

(Arpeggiator)” (page E-23).

Press the R-15 (EXIT) button.

• This exits the type selection screen.

Press the R-18 (AUTO HARMONIZE/

ARPEGGIATOR) button.

• This causes a pointer indicator to appear on the display

next to A.HAR.

Play chords and the melody on the keyboard.

• Harmony will be added to your melody notes based on

the chords you play.

To turn off auto harmonize, press the R-18

(AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR) button

again.

• This causes the pointer indicator next to A.HAR. to

disappear.

Using Auto Harmonize

To play using auto harmonize

Type

Number

Type

Name Description

001 Duet 1

Adds close (separated by two to

four degrees) one-note harmony

below the melody note.

002 Duet 2

Adds open (separated by more

than 4 to 6 degrees) 1-note

harmony below the melody note.

003 Country Adds country style harmony.

004 Octave Adds the note from the next lower

octave.

005 5th Adds the fifth degree note.

006 3WayOpen Adds 2-note open harmony, for a

total of three notes.

007 3WayClos Adds 2-note close harmony, for a

total of three notes.

008 Strings Adds harmony that is optimal for

strings.

Type number Type name

009 4WayOpen Adds 3-note open harmony, for a

total of four notes.

010 4WayClos Adds 3-note close harmony, for a

total of four notes.

011 Block Adds block chord notes.

012 Big Band Adds big band style harmony.

Type

Number

Type

Name Description

Lit

CTK7300IN_e.book 28 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-29

Applying Effects to a Sound

You can apply a variety of different acoustic effects to the sounds produced by the Digital Keyboard. The built-in effects include a

wide variety of variations that give you access to a selection of general digital effects.

• The Digital Keyboard also lets you apply effects to input from the T-4 (INST IN) jack and T-6 (MIC IN) jack.

The following shows how Digital Keyboard effects are configured.

• Items such as “Reverb Send” that are indicated by the symbol are all mixer settings. For details, see “Using the Mixer”

(page E-36).

• Chorus and DSP cannot be used at the same time.

■Chorus Effect Mode Configuration

The chorus effect mode is enabled while “Chorus” is selected for the “Chorus/DSP” effect parameter. Chorus and reverb can be

used in the chorus effect mode.

• For information about “Chorus/DSP”, see “Selecting an Effect” (page E-31).

Configuration of Effects

Part Volume/Pan

Reverb Send

Chorus Send

Volume/Pan

Reverb Send

Chorus Send

Mic In

Inst In

Reverb

Chorus

Master

Volume/Pan

Tone Generator

Part A01-A16, B01-B16

External Input

Output

Mono

Stereo

Noise Gate Auto Level

Control

CTK7300IN_e.book 29 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Applying Effects to a Sound

E-30

■DSP Effect Mode Configuration

The DSP effect mode is enabled while “DSP” is selected for the “Chorus/DSP”effect parameter. DSP and reverb can be used in the

DSP effect mode.

• Reverb

This type of effect simulates acoustic spaces. There are 10 different reverb effects, including room and hall.

•Chorus

This type of effect increases the depth of notes and applies vibrato to notes. There are five different chorus effects.

•DSP

This type of effect is inserted between the sound source and output. There are a total of 100 different DSP effects, including

distortion and modulation. You also can transfer DSP effects from a computer or create DSP data on the Digital Keyboard, and

store up to 100 user DSP effects in Digital Keyboard memory. For details, see “Creating a User DSP” (page E-33) and

“Connecting to a Computer” (page E-145).

DSP

Part Volume/Pan

Reverb Send

Volume/Pan

Reverb Send

Mic In

Inst In

Reverb

Master

Volume/Pan

DSP Reverb Send

DSP Volume/Pan

Tone Generator

Part A01-A16, B01-B16

Off

External Input

Output

Mono

Stereo

Off

Noise Gate Auto Level

Control

CTK7300IN_e.book 30 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Applying Effects to a Sound

E-31

Effects are divided among different types (reverb, chorus,

DSP), so first you need to use the procedure below to select

an effect type.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-7 (EFFECT) button.

• This displays the effect setting screen shown below.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select the

reverb type you want to use.

• Refer to the separate “Appendix” for information about

supported reverb types.

• To turn off reverb, select “oFF” here.

Press the C-7 (EFFECT) button or the R-15

(EXIT) button.

• This exits the effect setting screen.

• A pointer indicator is displayed next to REVERB when

anything other than “oFF” is selected for the reverb type.

The pointer indicator is not displayed next to REVERB

when “oFF” is selected.

• You can use Reverb Send to adjust how reverb is applied

to the tone of each keyboard or Auto Accompaniment part.

For details, see “Using the Mixer” (page E-36).

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-7 (EFFECT) button to

display the effect setting screen.

R-15R-15

R-17R-17

R-13R-13

R-16R-16

C-7C-7

R-14R-14

Selecting an Effect

To add reverb to sounds

To add the chorus effect to sounds

CTK7300IN_e.book 31 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Applying Effects to a Sound

E-32

If you want, use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to

move the thick brackets (%) to the “DSP

Disable”setting, and then use the R-14 (–, +)

buttons to change the setting to “on”.

• For more information about this setting, see the

“Important!” note below.

• If you turning on the “DSP Disable” setting, you should

skip steps 3 and 4 below.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the thick

brackets (%) to the “Chorus/DSP” setting.

Use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select “Chorus”.

• This enters the chorus effect mode, which enables the

use of the chorus effect.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the thick

brackets (%) to the “Chorus” setting.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select the

chorus type you want to use.

• Refer to the separate “Appendix” for information about

supported chorus types.

Press the C-7 (EFFECT) button or the R-15

(EXIT) button.

• This exits the effect setting screen.

Use the mixer to adjust the chorus send of the

part to which you want to apply chorus.

• You can use “Cho.Send” (Part Chorus Send, page

E-43) to adjust how chorus is applied to the tone of

each keyboard or Auto Accompaniment part. The initial

default setting is 0 for the chorus send of all parts, so

change the settings to a chorus send value greater than

0 for all parts to which you want to apply the chorus

effect. For details, see “Using the Mixer” (page E-36).

• Selecting a tone with DSP causes the “Chorus/DSP”

setting to change automatically to the “DSP” (DSP

effect mode), so the chorus effect will not be available.

If you want the chorus effect always to be available,

change the “DSP Disable” setting to “on”. This will

keep the Digital Keyboard in the chorus effect mode.

• A pointer indicator is displayed next to CHORUS when

“Chorus” is selected for the “Chorus/DSP” setting. The

pointer indicator is not displayed next to CHORUS when

“oFF” is selected for the chorus type or when “DSP” is

selected for the “Chorus/DSP” setting.

• Selecting “Chorus” for the “Chorus/DSP” setting will cause

the “DSP Line” (Part DSP Line, page E-43) setting for all

parts to be changed to “oFF”.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-7 (EFFECT) button to

display the effect setting screen.

• Check to make sure that the “DSP Disable” setting is

“oFF”. If it is “on”, change it to “oFF”.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the thick

brackets (%) to “Chorus/DSP”.

Use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select “DSP”.

• This enters the DSP effect mode, which enables the

use of the DSP effect.

To use a DSP

CTK7300IN_e.book 32 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Applying Effects to a Sound

E-33

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the thick

brackets (%) to the “DSP” setting.

• This causes the number and name of the currently

selected preset DSP to appear within the thick brackets

(%) on the display.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select the

preset DSP you want to use.

• DSPs with the leading numbers 001 through 100 (and

“ton”) are preset DSPs. See “Preset DSP List” (page

E-155) for information about preset DSP numbers and

names.

• DSP types with the leading numbers 101 through 200

are user DSPs. For details, see “Creating a User DSP”

(page E-33).

Press the C-7 (EFFECT) button or the R-15

(EXIT) button.

• This exits the effect setting screen.

• A pointer indicator is displayed next to DSP when “DSP” is

selected for the “Chorus/DSP” setting.

• Maximum polyphony is reduced by a maximum of two

notes when playing on the keyboard while a DSP is in use.

• You also can adjust how a DSP is applied (DSP output

enabled/disabled, DSP output volume, DSP output pan,

etc.) For details, see “Using the Mixer” (page E-36).

You can create a user DSP by editing one of the built-in

preset DSPs.

DSP areas numbered 101 through 200 are for storage of user

DSPs. You can have up to 100 user DSPs stored in memory

at one time. To recall a stored user DSP, use the same

procedure you use to recall a preset DSP. See “To use a

DSP” (page E-32) for more information.

Referring to the “DSP Type List” (page E-156),

select the DSP type you want to edit in order to

create your user DSP.

Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to “DSP

Edit”.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This displays page one of the DSP editor screen. Use

this screen to select the DSP type.

• You can use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to scroll

between pages.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a

DSP type.

Creating a User DSP

User DSP Numbers

To create and save a user DSP

Total number of pages

Currently displayed page

DSP type DSP number

CTK7300IN_e.book 33 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Applying Effects to a Sound

E-34

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

the parameter you want to change.

• For information about the operation and the setting

range of each parameter, see “DSP Parameter

Settings” (page E-35).

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting value.

• Pressing the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time

returns a parameter to its initial default setting.

• Changing the DSP parameter while a note is being

output from the Digital Keyboard may cause noise to be

generated. This does not indicate malfunction.

Repeat steps 5 and 6 as required to configure

other parameters.

Press the R-15 (EXIT) button.

• This displays the confirmation screen shown below.

To cancel the editor operation without saving the edited

results, press the R-14 (NO) button.

Press the R-14 (YES) button.

• This displays a screen for specifying the destination

user DSP number and DSP name.

10.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select the

destination user DSP number you want.

11.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the

cursor to the name character position you want

to change, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)

buttons to select the character you want.

• See “Supported Input Characters” (page E-160) for

information about the characters you can input for the

name.

• To input a space, press both of the R-14 (–, +) buttons

at the same time.

12.

After everything is the way you want, press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

• A message (Replace?) will appear on the display to

confirm whether you want to replace the existing data

with the new data. Press the R-14 (YES) button to

replace the existing data with the new data.

• The message “Please Wait” will remain on the display

while a data save operation is in progress. Do not

perform any other operation while it is displayed.

Turning off the Digital Keyboard or removing the

memory card can cause Digital Keyboard data to be

deleted or become corrupted. It also can cause the

Digital Keyboard to fail to turn on when the L-1 (P)

button is pressed. If this happens, refer to

“Troubleshooting” (page E-150).

DSP name

Destination user DSP number

CTK7300IN_e.book 34 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Applying Effects to a Sound

E-35

The table below shows the parameters that can be configured on the DSP editor screen.

The settings marked with an asterisk (*) in the “Setting Range” column are initial defaults.

DSP Parameter Settings

Parameter Name Description Setting Range

Parameters 1 through 8 The number of parameters and settings available for each parameter

depends on the DSP type. For details, see “DSP Parameter List” (page

E-157).

–

DSP RevSend

(DSP Reverb Send)

Specifies how much of the post-DSP sound should be sent to reverb. 0 - 40* - 127

Mod Button Assign*1

(Modulation Button Assign)

Specifies the function assigned to the S-2 (MODULATION) button when

“DSP” is selected for the “Mod Setting” tone parameter (page E-49).

Specifying a value from 1 through 8 assigns the corresponding DSP

parameter (1 through 8). Nothing is assigned to the button when “oFF” is

selected for this parameter.

oFF*, 1 - 8*2

Mod Button On Value*1

(Modulation Button On Value)

Specifies how the function currently assigned to the S-2

(MODULATION) button works while the button is depressed.

Mod Button Off Value*1

(Modulation Button Off Value)

Specifies how the function currently assigned to the S-2

(MODULATION) button works while the button is released.

Rot Button Assign*4

(Rotary Button Assign)

Specifies the function assigned to the D-1 (ROTARY SLOW/FAST)

button.

Specifying a value from 1 through 8 assigns the corresponding DSP

parameter (1 through 8). Nothing is assigned to the button when “oFF” is

selected for this parameter.

oFF*, 1 - 8*2

Rot Button On Value*4

(Rotary Button On Value)

Specifies how the function currently assigned to the D-1 (ROTARY

SLOW/FAST) button works while the button is lit.

Rot Button Off Value*4

(Rotary Button Off Value)

Specifies how the function currently assigned to the D-1 (ROTARY

SLOW/FAST) button works while the button is unlit.

*1 Included in the “Mod Button” group. To change the settings of these parameters, move the 0 to “Mod Button” and then press

the R-16 (ENTER) button. Next, use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to the parameter whose setting you want to

change.

*2 Setting range depends on the selected DSP type.

*3 Depends on the selected DSP type and the “Mod Button Assign” setting.

*4 Included in the “Rot Button” group. To change the settings of these parameters, move the 0 to “Rot Button” and then press the

R-16 (ENTER) button. Next, use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to the parameter whose setting you want to change.

*5 Depends on the selected DSP type and the “Rot Button Assign” setting.

CTK7300IN_e.book 35 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-36

Using the Mixer

The sound source of this Digital Keyboard is capable of

sounding up to 32 individual parts simultaneously. Each part

can be controlled individually, and each part can be

configured to sound a different musical instrument. Different

tones can be assigned to each part when using layer and split

to sound multiple tones at the same time, and to sound

multiple instruments at the same time with Auto

Accompaniment.

The mixer can be used to assign such tones and to configure

other settings for each part, and to configure global effect

settings applied to all parts. The mixer provides you with the

means to make fine adjustments to a wide variety of settings,

from note generation to note output.

This Digital Keyboard has a total of 32 parts: A01 through

A16, and B01 through B16. Each part has a specific purpose.

Use the table below as a reference to determine the purpose

of each part when using the mixer to configure the settings of

a part.

C-17C-17

C-7C-7

R-17R-17R-14R-14

R-16R-16R-15R-15R-13R-13

D-3D-3

D-2D-2

D-1D-1 D-4

D-12D-4

D-12

Mixer Overview

How Parts are Organized

This

part: Is used for this: Go here for more

information:

A01 Manual play UPPER 1 part “Layering and Splitting

Tones” (page E-15)

A02 Manual play UPPER 2 part

A03 Manual play LOWER part

A04 Auto harmonize tone “Using Auto Harmonize”

(page E-28)

A05 UPPER 1 part*1“Using the Song

Sequencer” (page E-68)

A06 UPPER 2 part*2

A07 LOWER part*3

A08 Metronome sound “Using the Metronome”

(page E-19)

A09 Auto Accompaniment

percussion part

“Using Auto

Accompaniment” (page

E-24)

A10 Auto Accompaniment drums

part

A11 Auto Accompaniment bass

part

A12 to

A16

Auto Accompaniment Chord 1

part through Chord 5 part

B01 to

B16

Song sequencer track B01

through B16, tracks 1 through

16 during playback of a MIDI

file from a memory card, CH1

through CH16 during MIDI

receive

“Using the Song

Sequencer” (page

E-68),

“Playing a Music File

from a Memory Card”

(page E-142),

“Connecting to a

Computer” (page E-145)

*1 UPPER 1 part recorded to the song sequencer system

track.

*2 UPPER 2 part recorded to the song sequencer system

track.

*3 LOWER part recorded to the song sequencer system

track.

This

part: Is used for this: Go here for more

information:

CTK7300IN_e.book 36 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Mixer

E-37

Press the C-7 (MIXER) button.

• This causes the mixer screen to appear.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the

mixer parameter you want to change.

• You can select master (MASTER), effect (DSP), MIC/

INST input (EXT(M/I)), or a part (A01 through A16, B01

through B16). The currently selected setting is shown in

the line two of the display.

• While a part is selected, you can toggle between Group

A and Group B by pressing both of the R-17 (u, i)

buttons at the same time.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the thick

brackets (%) to the parameter you want to

change.

• The parameters that can be configured depend on the

currently selected setting. For details, refer to the

sections shown in the table below.

• When you move the thick brackets (%) to one of the

setting values of a part parameter, all of the part

parameter values of the Group (A or B) to which the

part belongs are indicated by level meter black boxes.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting value.

• Pressing the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time

returns a parameter to its initial default setting.

• You also can change the settings of parameters using

the D-1 (PART/COMMON), D-2 (GROUP A/B), and

D-3 (1-8/9-16) buttons, and sliders D-4 (1/9/EXT) to

D-12 (MASTER). For more information, see “Using the

Sliders to Change Parameter Settings” (page E-38).

• While the “Part” (part on/off) setting of a part parameter

is being configured, pressing both of the R-14 (–, +)

buttons at the same time will change the setting to “Sol”

(Solo). For details, see “Part Parameters” (page E-43).

Repeat steps 2 through 4 as required to

configure other parameters.

To exit the mixer, press the C-7 (MIXER) button

or the R-15 (EXIT) button.

• This exits the mixer screen.

• While master (MASTER), effect (DSP) or MIC/INST input

(EXT(M/I)) is selected in step 2 above for setting, you also

can perform normal keyboard play (play using layer, split,

and Auto Accompaniment).

• While an individual part (A01 through A16, B01 through

B16) is selected in step 2 above for setting, pressing a

keyboard key will sound only notes of the selected part. All

other types of performance operations (layer, split, Auto

Accompaniment, etc.) are disabled.

Mixer Operation

To change mixer parameters

When this setting is

selected:

These parameters can be

configured:

MASTER MASTER Parameters

(page E-41)

EXT(M/I) MIC/INST Parameters (External

MIC IN/INST IN <EXT(M/I)>)

(page E-42)

DSP DSP Parameters (page E-41)

A01 to A16/B01 to B16 Part Parameters (page E-43)

Currently selected setting

(MASTER, EXT(M/I), DSP, or A01 to A16/B01 to B16)

Parameter/Setting value

Currently selected setting part

(when currently selected setting is A01 to A16/B01 to B16)

CTK7300IN_e.book 37 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Mixer

E-38

While the mixer screen is displayed, use sliders D-4 (1/9/EXT) to D-12 (MASTER) to change the displayed parameter settings. The

D-1 (PART/COMMON), D-2 (GROUP A/B) and D-3 (1-8/9-16) buttons are used to specify the parts that correspond to sliders D-4

(1/9/EXT) to D-11 (8/16).

The following describes the operation of these buttons and sliders while the mixer screen is displayed.

●D-1 (PART/COMMON) button:

Each press toggles the mixer screen between master parameter settings (MASTER) and the settings of one of the part (A01

through A16, B01 through B16) parameters.

●D-2 (GROUP A/B) button:

Each press toggles the part parameter setting screen between one of the parts in group L (A01 through A16) and one of the

parts in group M (B01 through B16).

●D-3 (1-8/9-16) button:

Each press toggles the parts that correspond to parameter operations by sliders D-4 (1/9/EXT) to D-11 (8/16) between A01

through A08 (or B01 through B08) and A09 through A16 (or B09 through B16).

Using the Sliders to Change Parameter Settings

D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5 D-6 D-7 D-8D-9 D-10 D-11 D-12

CTK7300IN_e.book 38 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Mixer

E-39

●Sliders D-4 (1/9/EXT) through D-11 (8/16):

Allow configuration of the following parameter settings in

accordance with the currently displayed mixer setting.

*Operating a slider whose setting does not correspond to

anything on the currently displayed setting screen will

automatically switch to the setting screen that corresponds

to the slider. For example, if you operate slider D-4 (1/9/

EXT) while the master parameter setting screen is

displayed, the display will automatically switch to the MIC/

INST parameter setting screen.

●Slider D-12 (MASTER):

Changes the master parameter setting. Operating this

slider while any screen other than the master parameter

setting screen is displayed will automatically switch to the

master parameter setting screen.

■Setting Operation Example: To adjust the volume

of parts A01 through A16

While the mixer setting screen is displayed, use

the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select one of the

parts (A01 through A08).

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“Volume”.

• This enables modification of the part volume setting.

Use sliders D-4 (1/9/EXT) to D-11 (8/16) to adjust

the volume of each part (A01 through A08).

• As you move a slider to change a part volume, the

setting is reflected in the value inside the thick brackets

(%) and on the level meter.

Next, to adjust the volumes of parts A09

through A16, press the D-3 (1-8/9-16) button.

Use sliders D-4 (1/9/EXT) to D-11 (8/16) to adjust

the volume of each part (A09 through A16).

When this setting

screen is displayed:

These parameter settings can be

configured:

MASTER Parameters

(page E-41),

MIC/INST Parameters

(External MIC IN/

INST IN <EXT(M/I)>)

(page E-42),

DSP Parameters

(page E-41)

Slider D-4 (1/9/EXT):

MIC/INST parameters*

Slider D-5 (2/10/DSP):

DSP parameters*

Sliders D-6 (3/11) to D-11 (8/16):

Parameters of part assigned to

each slider*

Part Parameters

(page E-43)

Sliders D-4 (1/9/EXT) to

D-11 (8/16):

Parameters of part assigned to

each slider*

CTK7300IN_e.book 39 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Mixer

E-40

• For details about how initial default settings are configured

when you perform the following procedure, see “Parameter

List” (page E-162).

While the mixer screen is displayed, hold down

the R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you press the

C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays the mixer menu screen with the 0 next to

“Initialize”.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to

initialize all mixer parameters or the R-14 (NO)

button to cancel.

While the mixer screen is displayed, hold down

the R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you press the

C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays the mixer menu.

Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to

“Display” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting.

After the setting is the way you want, press the

R-15 (EXIT) button to exit the menu.

To initialize all mixer parameters To change the information displayed by the

level meter while configuring part parameter

settings

To select display of this

information: Select this setting:

Part parameter setting values Param

Volume level Meter

CTK7300IN_e.book 40 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Mixer

E-41

The tables below show the parameters that can be configured on the mixer screen.

The settings marked with an asterisk (*) in the “Setting Range” column are initial defaults.

MASTER parameters include items for adjusting the volume level, pan position, and other settings that are applied globally to all

parts.

DSP parameters include DSP-related settings that are applied globally to all parts.

• DSP parameter setting cannot be changed while “on” is selected for the “DSP Disable” effect setting. See “To add the

chorus effect to sounds” (page E-31) for information about “DSP Disable”. If you want to change DSP parameter

settings, change the “DSP Disable” setting to “oFF”.

Mixer Parameter Settings

MASTER Parameters

Parameter Name Description Setting Range

Volume

(Master Volume)

Specifies the maximum volume level of Digital Keyboard output.

The level set here is the maximum level that can be set with the L-2 (VOLUME)

knob.

0 to 127*

Pan

(Master Pan)

Specifies the stereo pan position of all sound output by the Digital Keyboard.

0 indicates the center, while a smaller values shifts to the left and a larger value

shifts to the right.

–64 to 0* to +63

DSP Parameters

Parameter Name Description Setting Range

Cho/DSP

(Chorus/DSP)

Specifies whether the Digital Keyboard’s sound source should go through

the chorus or DSP.*1 This setting item is linked to the “Chorus/DSP”*2 item

on the effect setting screen. The settings below cannot be configured

whenever this parameter is “Chorus”.

Chorus*, DSP

Part

(DSP Output Enable)

Specifies if a note should be output (on) or not output (oFF) after it passes

through the DSP.

oFF, on*

Volume

(DSP Output Volume)

Specifies the post-DSP volume level.*10 to 127*

Pan

(DSP Output Pan)

Specifies the post-DSP send stereo pan position. 0 indicates the center,

while a smaller values shifts to the left and a larger value shifts to the right.

–64 to 0* to +63

Rev.Send

(DSP Output Reverb Send)

Specifies how much reverb is applied to the post-DSP send note. 0 to 40* to 127

*1 See the block diagram under “Configuration of Effects” (page E-29).

*2 See “To add the chorus effect to sounds” (page E-31) and “To use a DSP” (page E-32).

CTK7300IN_e.book 41 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Mixer

E-42

MIC/INST parameters include settings related to the T-4 (INST IN) and T-6 (MIC IN) terminals.

MIC/INST Parameters (External MIC IN/INST IN <EXT(M/I)>)

Parameter Name Description Setting Range

Part

(Mic/Inst Enable)

Specifies if sound input should be output (on) or not output (oFF). oFF, on*

Volume

(Mic/Inst Volume)*1

Specifies the volume level of sound input. 0 to 80* to 127

Pan

(Mic/Inst Pan)

Specifies the stereo pan position of sound input. 0 indicates the center, while a

smaller values shifts to the left and a larger value shifts to the right.

–64 to 0* to +63

DSP Line

(Mic/Inst DSP Line)

Specifies whether DSP should be applied to sound input. oFF*, on

Rev.Send

(Mic/Inst Reverb Send)

Specifies how much reverb is applied to sound input. 0 to 40* to 127

Cho.Send

(Mic/Inst Chorus Send)

Specifies how much chorus effect is applied to sound input. 0* to 127

N.Thresh

(Mic/Inst Noise Gate

Threshold)*1

Cuts low-volume input sounds, which decreases noise. Allows a signal to pass

through if it is above the set threshold (gate open). Does not allow a signal to

pass if it is below the threshold (gate closed).

0 to 20* to 127

N.Release

(Mic/Inst Noise Gate

Release)*1

Specifies the amount of time for the gate to go from open to fully closed when an

input sound signal falls below the threshold value specified by “N.Thresh”.

Setting 0 will abruptly cut off the sound, while a larger value will cause the gate

to close more slowly.

0 to 64* to 127

Auto Level

(Mic/Inst Auto Level

Control)*1

Automatically controls the input signal level. Selecting “oFF” disables this

feature, while a larger value applies a greater degree of control.

oFF*, 1 to 3

*1 See the block diagram under “Configuration of Effects” (page E-29).

CTK7300IN_e.book 42 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Mixer

E-43

Part parameters include setting items that can be adjusted for parts A01 through A16 and B01 through B16.

Part Parameters

Parameter Name Description Setting Range

TONE

(Part Tone)

Specifies a tone for each part. When configuring this parameter, you can use the

buttons R-1 ([A] PIANO) through R-12 ([L] DRAWBAR ORGAN) to select a tone

group.

A:001 to L:100

Part

(Part On/Off)

Specifies if the notes of a particular part should be output (on) or not output (oFF).

When a part is turned on, the part number is displayed along the bottom of the level

meter. Part numbers are not displayed for parts that are turned off.

When playing back a MIDI file or song sequencer song, a “Sol” (Solo) option can be

specified to play a specific part only. To switch to “Sol”, press both R-14 (–, +)

buttons at the same time.

oFF, on*

Volume

(Part Volume)

Specifies the volume level of each part. 0 to 127*

Pan

(Part Pan)

Specifies the stereo pan position of each part. 0 indicates the center, while a smaller

values shifts to the left and a larger value shifts to the right.

–64 to 0* to +63

CoarseTune

(Part Coarse Tune)

Specifies, in semitone steps, the pitch of the notes of each part. –24 to 0* to +24

FineTune

(Part Fine Tune)

Specifies, in cent steps, the pitch of the notes of each part. –99 to 0* to +99

BendRange

(Part Bend Range)

Specifies the bend range of each part. 0 to 2* to 24

DSP Line

(Part DSP Line)

Specifies whether DSP should be applied to each part. Changing this setting from

“oFF” to “on” automatically switches the “Chorus/DSP” setting (page E-41) to “DSP”.

oFF*, on

Rev.Send

(Part Reverb Send)

Specifies how much reverb is applied to each part.

No reverb is applied at all when this setting is 0, while maximum reverb is applied

when it is 127.

0 to 40* to 127

Cho.Send

(Part Chorus Send)

Specifies how much chorus is applied to each part.

No chorus is applied at all when this setting is 0, while maximum chorus is applied

when it is 127.

0* to 127

Scale

(Part Scale Enable)

Specifies whether scale (page E-21) settings should be applied (on) or should not be

applied (oFF). Equal temperament is applied to parts when this setting is “oFF”.

oFF, on*

CTK7300IN_e.book 43 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-44

Using the Tone Editor

You can create a user tone by editing one of the built-in preset

tones.

• This section covers editing of preset tone groups A through

• For information about editing group L (drawbar organ)

tones, see “Editing Drawbar Organ Tones” (page E-52).

The preset tones built into this Digital Keyboard consist of a

number of parameters. To create a user tone, you first recall a

preset tone (A:001 to J:128) and then modify its parameters to

change it to your own original tone.

Note that drum set sounds (J:129 to J:146) cannot be used as

the basis of a user tone.

The illustration nearby shows the parameters that make up

the preset tones, and what each parameter does. As can be

seen in the illustration, parameters can be divided into four

groups, each of which is described in detail below.

R-15R-15 R-11R-11

R-17R-17

R-13R-13

R-16R-16

C-17C-17

C-8C-8

R-14R-14

Tone Creation Overview

Volume Characteristic

Parameters

• Attack Time

• Release Time

• Cutoff Frequency

Tone Pitch Parameters

• Vibrato Type

• Vibrato Depth

• Vibrato Rate

• Vibrato Delay

• Octave Shift

Tone Characteristic

Setting Parameters

• Volume

• Touch Sense

• Reverb Send

• Chorus Send

•DSP Line

•DSP Type

• DSP Parameters

Tone

Characteristic

Waveform

• Tone

Setting

Output

CTK7300IN_e.book 44 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Tone Editor

E-45

•Tone Setting

Specifies which of the preset tones should be used as the

original tone.

These parameters control how the tone changes over time,

from when the keyboard key is pressed until the tone decays.

You can specify changes in volume and sound

characteristics.

• Attack time

This is the rate or time it takes for the tone to reach its highest

volume level. You can specify a fast rate, where the tone

reaches its highest volume level immediately, a slow rate

where it gradually rises, or something in between.

• Release time

This is the rate or time it takes for the tone volume to fall to

zero after a keyboard key is released. You can specify a

release that ranges from a sudden fall to zero, to one that

gradually falls to zero.

• Cutoff Frequency

The cutoff frequency is a parameter for adjusting timbre by

cutting any frequency that is higher than a specific frequency.

A larger cutoff frequency produces a brighter (harder) timbre,

while a smaller frequency produces a darker (softer) timbre.

• Vibrato Type, Vibrato Delay, Vibrato Rate, Vibrato

Depth

These parameters adjust the vibrato effect, which causes

periodic changes in the tone.

• Octave Shift

This parameter controls the octave of all tones.

•Volume

This parameter controls the overall volume of the tone.

•Touch Sense

This parameter controls changes in volume and timbre in

accordance with the relative amount of pressure applied to

the keyboard keys. You can specify more volume for stronger

pressure and less volume or a lighter pressure, or you can

specify the same volume regardless of how much pressure is

applied to the keys.

• Reverb Send, Chorus Send, DSP Line, DSP Type, DSP

Parameters

These parameters control the effects applied to tones.

(1) Tone Characteristic Waveform

(2) Volume Characteristic Parameters

Key pressed Key released

Envelope

Note ends

Time

A : Attack time

R : Release time

Level

Frequency

Cutoff frequency

(3) Tone Pitch Parameters

(4) Tone Characteristic Setting Parameters

CTK7300IN_e.book 45 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Tone Editor

E-46

Tone areas numbered K:001 through K:100 are for storage of

user tones. You can have up to 100 user tones stored in

memory at one time. You can recall a stored user tone by

pressing the R-11 ([K] USER TONES) button. See “To select

a tone” (page E-14).

Select the tone you want to edit in order to

create your user tone.

• Select the tone you want to edit from group A through J

(preset tones) or group K (user tones).

• The parameters you can edit for group L (drawbar

organ) tones are different from those that you can edit

for group A through K tones. See “Editing Drawbar

Organ Tones” (page E-52) for more information.

Press the C-8 (TONE EDITOR) button.

• This displays the tone editor screen.

• You can use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to scroll

between pages.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

the parameter you want to change.

• For information about the operation and the setting

range of each parameter, see “Tone Parameter

Settings” (page E-48).

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting value.

• Pressing the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time

returns a parameter to its initial default setting.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required to configure

other parameters.

To save a rhythm after you edit it, hold down

the R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you press the

C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays the tone editor menu.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This displays a screen for specifying the destination

user tone number and tone name.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select the

destination user tone number you want.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the

cursor to the name character position you want

to change, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)

buttons to select the character you want.

• See “Supported Input Characters” (page E-160) for

information about the characters you can input for the

name.

• To input a space, press both of the R-14 (–, +) buttons

at the same time.

10.

After everything is the way you want, press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

• A message (Replace?) will appear on the display to

confirm whether you want to replace the existing data

with the new data. Press the R-14 (YES) button to

replace the existing data with the new data.

Creating a User Tone

User Tone Numbers

To create and save a user tone

Parameter name Current setting

Total number of pages

Currently displayed page

Currently selected parameter

(Enclosed by thick brackets %).

Tone name

Destination user tone number

CTK7300IN_e.book 46 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Tone Editor

E-47

• The message “Please Wait” will remain on the display

while a data save operation is in progress. Do not

perform any other operation while it is displayed.

Turning off the Digital Keyboard or removing the

memory card can cause Digital Keyboard data to be

deleted or become corrupted. It also can cause the

Digital Keyboard to fail to turn on when the L-1 (P)

button is pressed. If this happens, refer to

“Troubleshooting” (page E-150).

• Pressing the R-15 (EXIT) button in place of step 6 displays

the confirmation screen shown below. Pressing the R-14

(YES) button at this time will display the tone save screen in

step 7.

To cancel the editor operation without saving the edited

results, press the R-14 (NO) button.

CTK7300IN_e.book 47 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Tone Editor

E-48

The table below shows the parameters that can be configured on the tone editor screen. For information about each parameter,

also refer to “Tone Creation Overview” (page E-44).

The settings marked with an asterisk (*) in the “Setting Range” column are initial defaults.

Tone Parameter Settings

Parameter Name Description Setting Range

AttackTime

(Attack Time)

Specifies the time until a note starts to sound after a key is pressed. –64 to 0* to +63

ReleasTime

(Release Time)

Specifies the time a note continues to sound after a key is released. –64 to 0* to +63

CutOff

(Cutoff Frequency)

Adjusts timbre by attenuating note components that are higher than a certain

frequency. A larger value produces a brighter, harder sound, while a lower

value produces a mellower, softer sound.

–64 to 0* to +63

Vib.Type

(Vibrato Type)

Specifies the vibrato type (vibrato waveform). Sin*, Tri, Saw, Sqr

Vib.Depth

(Vibrato Depth)

Specifies how much vibrato is applied to a note. –64 to 0* to +63

Vib.Rate

(Vibrato Rate)

Specifies the speed of the vibrato applied to a note. –64 to 0* to +63

Vib.Delay

(Vibrato Delay)

Specifies how much time elapses until vibrato starts. –64 to 0* to +63

Oct.Shift

(Octave Shift)

Shifts the pitch upwards or downwards in octave steps. –2 to 0* to +2

Volume

(Volume)

Specifies the volume level of all tones. A larger value sets a higher volume

level.

0 to 127*

TouchSense

(Touch Sense)

Specifies how much the volume changes in accordance with the relative

amount of pressure applied to keyboard keys. A larger positive value results

more change in volume in accordance with key pressure. A larger negative

values results in less change in volume in accordance with key pressure. Key

pressure does not affect volume when a value of 0 is set.

–64 to 0 to +63*

Rev.Send

(Reverb Send)

Specifies how much reverb is applied for each tone. 0 to 40* to 127

Cho.Send

(Chorus Send)

Specifies how much chorus is applied for each tone. 0* to 127

DSP On Off

(DSP On/Off)

Specifies whether DSP should be applied (on) or not applied (oFF) to notes.

The following four settings become enabled when “on” is selected for this

setting.

oFF*, on

DSP Specifies the DSP to be applied to tones using DSP numbers (001 to 100:

Preset DSPs; 101 to 200: User DSPs). Selecting “ton” applies the initial preset

DSP of each tone.

ton*, 001 to 200

DSP Type

(DSP Type)

Shows the DSP type number corresponding to the above DSP value that is set

automatically as the initial default setting.*1 You can modify the initial default

setting and select a different DSP type.

01 to 46*1

Setting Description Waveform

Sin Sine wave

Tri Triangle wave

Saw Sawtooth wave

Sqr Square wave

CTK7300IN_e.book 48 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Tone Editor

E-49

DSP Parameters 1

through 8

Shows up to eight parameters for “DSP Type”. *2*2

DSP RevSend

(DSP Reverb Send)

Adjusts how much reverb is applied to the post-DSP note. 0 to 40* to 127

Mod Setting

(Modulation Setting)

Assigns either vibrato or DSP to the S-2 (MODULATION) button. Vib*, DSP

Mod Depth

(Modulation Depth)

When vibrato is assigned to the S-2 (MODULATION) button, specifies the

depth of vibrato applied to a tone while the button is depressed.

0 to 127 (Default

setting depends on

the tone.)

Mod Button Assign*3

(Modulation Button

Assign)

Specifies the function assigned to the S-2 (MODULATION) button when “DSP”

is selected for the “Mod Setting”. Specifying a value from 1 through 8 assigns

the corresponding DSP parameter (1 through 8). Nothing is assigned to the

button when “oFF” is selected for this parameter.

oFF*, 1 to 8*4

Mod Button On Value*3

(Modulation Button On

Value)

Specifies how the function currently assigned to the S-2 (MODULATION)

button works while the button is depressed.

Mod Button Off Value*3

(Modulation Button Off

Value)

Specifies how the function currently assigned to the S-2 (MODULATION)

button works while the button is released.

Rot Button Assign*6

(Rotary Button Assign)

Specifies the function assigned to the D-1 (ROTARY SLOW/FAST) button.

Specifying a value from 1 through 8 assigns the corresponding DSP parameter

(1 through 8). Nothing is assigned to the button when “oFF” is selected for this

parameter.

oFF*, 1 to 8*4

Rot Button On Value*6

(Rotary Button On Value)

Specifies how the function currently assigned to the D-1 (ROTARY SLOW/

FAST) button works while the button is lit.

Rot Button Off Value*6

(Rotary Button Off Value)

Specifies how the function currently assigned to the D-1 (ROTARY SLOW/

FAST) button works while the button is unlit.

*1 See “Preset DSP List” (page E-155) for information about the DSP types of each preset DSP.

*2 The number of DSP parameters, their content, and their setting ranges depend on the DSP type. For details, see “DSP Type

List” (page E-156) and “DSP Parameter List” (page E-157).

*3 Included in the “Mod Button” group. To change the settings of these parameters, move the 0 to “Mod Button” and then press

the R-16 (ENTER) button. Next, use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to the parameter whose setting you want to

change.

*4 Setting range depends on the selected DSP type.

*5 Depends on the selected DSP type and the “Mod Button Assign” setting.

*6 Included in the “Rot Button” group. To change the settings of these parameters, move the 0 to “Rot Button” and then press the

R-16 (ENTER) button. Next, use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to the parameter whose setting you want to change.

*7 Depends on the selected DSP type and the “Rot Button Assign” setting.

Parameter Name Description Setting Range

CTK7300IN_e.book 49 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-50

Using Drawbar Organ Tones

Your Digital Keyboard comes with drawbar organ tones built

in that you can use for mixing waveform ratios, just like a

drawbar organ. The nine sliders, which correspond to

drawbars, can be used to change harmonic overtone level

settings and to create sounds by adding percussion and click

sounds in real time as you play. A button is also provided to

switch the rotary effect between fast and slow.

You also can edit parameters that are unique to drawbar

organ tones to create and store your own original user

drawbar organ tones.

■About the drawbars

The nine sliders from D-4 (16') through D-12 (1') perform the

role of the drawbars of a drawbar organ. Each slider is

assigned a harmonic overtone from 16' through 1'*.

*The prime symbol (') following a value such as 16'

represents a “length” in feet.

Refer to the separate “Appendix” to look up the

number of the drawbar organ tone you want.

Press the R-12 ([L] DRAWBAR ORGAN) button

to select the drawbar organ tone group.

• This displays the screen of one of the drawbar organ

tones. The level meter shows the harmonic overtone

levels for the foot “lengths” preset for the currently

selected drawbar organ tone.

Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to change

the number and select the tone you want.

• Selecting a tone changes the tone number and tone

name on the display, and also changes the level meter

to reflect the harmonic overtone levels for the selected

tone.

• Tone numbers L:051 through L:100 are user drawbar

organ tones. See “Editing Drawbar Organ Tones” (page

E-52) for more information.

Now you can play on the keyboard using the

tone you selected.

• You can adjust the harmonic overtone levels of drawbar

organ tones in real time as you play. See “Adjusting a

Drawbar Organ Tone in Real Time” (page E-51) for

more information.

C-17C-17 R-17R-17

R-16R-16R-14R-14

R-12R-12R-13R-13

D-3D-3

D-2D-2

D-1D-1 D-4

D-12D-4

D-12

C-8C-8

Playing with a Drawbar Organ

Tone

To select and play with a drawbar organ tone

D-4 D-5 D-6 D-7 D-8D-9 D-10 D-11 D-12

Foot “length” harmonic overtone levels (16' to 1')

CTK7300IN_e.book 50 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using Drawbar Organ Tones

E-51

Use the sliders and buttons to adjust drawbar organ tones in

real time.

Perform steps 1 through 3 of the procedure

under “To select and play with a drawbar organ

tone” (page E-50).

• The level meter shows the harmonic overtone levels for

the foot “lengths” preset for the currently selected

drawbar organ tone.

• You also could skip this step and start from step 2 of

this procedure, if you want.

Hold down the R-12 (MANUAL) button until the

foot “length” values (16' through 1') along the

top of the level meter flash twice. You can

release the button at this time.

• This will cause the level meter to indicate the current

positions of sliders D-4 (16') through D-12 (1'), and

apply applicable harmonic overtone levels to the

current tone.

Shift sliders D-4 (16') through D-12 (1') upwards

and downwards.

• When you do, the displayed harmonic overtone levels

will change accordingly in the level meter.

Now you can play on the keyboard using the

level-adjusted tone.

Adjusting a Drawbar Organ Tone in Real

Time

To do this: Do this:

Adjust tone harmonic

overtone levels

Shift sliders D-4 (16') through D-12

(1') upwards and downwards.

• Shifting one of the sliders

upwards or downwards changes

the harmonic overtone of the

corresponding foot “length” from

its current level (the level preset

for the tone).*1

• You also can configure the level

meter so it indicates the harmonic

overtone level of each slider

position. For more information,

see “To configure the level meter

to show the harmonic overtone

level of each slider position”

(page E-51).

Add or remove

percussion sound with

2nd overtone and 3rd

overtone pitch to a

tone

Use the D-2 (PERCUSSION

SECOND) and D-3 (PERCUSSION

THIRD) buttons.

• Each press toggles the button

between lit and unlit.

• The corresponding overtone

percussion is being applied to

notes while a button is lit, and not

being applied while it is unlit.

Switch the rotary

effect speed (rotation

speed)*2

Press the D-1 (ROTARY SLOW/

FAST) button.

• Each press toggles the button

between lit and unlit.

• Rotary speed is fast while the

button is lit and slow when it is

unlit.

*1 Adjustment to one of nine levels, from 0 to 8, is supported.

Each level is indicated by the level meter as shown below.

*2 This operation is supported only when DSP is being used

as the effect and the DSP type is “Rotary”. For details

about effects, see “Applying Effects to a Sound” (page

E-29). For details about DSP types, see “DSP Effect List”

(page E-155).

10 2345678

To configure the level meter to show the

harmonic overtone level of each slider

position

CTK7300IN_e.book 51 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using Drawbar Organ Tones

E-52

Tone areas numbered L:051 through L:100 are for storage of

user drawbar organ tones. You can have up to 50 user

drawbar organ tones stored in memory at one time.

You can recall a user drawbar organ tone by pressing the

R-12 ([L] DRAWBAR ORGAN) button and then using the dial

or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the tone number you

want. After recalling a user drawbar organ tone, you can

perform the same operations as those supported for preset

drawbar organ tones. For more information, see “To select

and play with a drawbar organ tone” (page E-50).

Select the drawbar organ tone you want to edit.

• Perform the procedure under “To select and play with a

drawbar organ tone” (page E-50).

• At this point, you can perform operations with sliders

D-4 (16') through D-12 (1'), and the D-2

(PERCUSSION SECOND) and D-3 (PERCUSSION

THIRD) buttons before starting the tone editing

operation. For details about using the sliders and

buttons, see “Adjusting a Drawbar Organ Tone in Real

Time” (page E-51) and “To configure the level meter to

show the harmonic overtone level of each slider

position” (page E-51).

Press the C-8 (TONE EDITOR) button.

• This displays the drawbar editor screen.

• You can use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to scroll

between pages.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

the parameter you want to change.

• For information about the operation and the setting

range of each parameter, see “Drawbar Organ Tone

Parameter Settings” (page E-53).

Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to change

the setting value.

• Pressing the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time

returns a parameter to its initial default setting.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required to configure

other parameters.

To store a rhythm after you edit it, hold down

the R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you press the

C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays the drawbar edit menu.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This displays a screen for specifying the destination

user drawbar organ tone number and tone name.

Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select

the destination user drawbar organ tone

number you want.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the

cursor to the name character position you want

to change, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)

buttons to select the character you want.

• For details about the characters you can input, see

“Supported Input Characters” (page E-160).

• To input a space, press both of the R-14 (–, +) buttons

at the same time.

10.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• A message (Replace?) will appear asking if you want to

overwrite the data currently in the destination with the

new data. Press the R-14 (YES) button to overwrite.

• The message “Please Wait” will remain on the display

while a data save operation is in progress. Do not

perform any other operation while it is displayed.

Turning off the Digital Keyboard or removing the

memory card can cause Digital Keyboard data to be

deleted or become corrupted. It also can cause the

Digital Keyboard to fail to turn on when the L-1 (P)

button is pressed. If this happens, refer to

“Troubleshooting” (page E-150).

Editing Drawbar Organ Tones

User Drawbar Organ Tone Numbers

To edit a drawbar organ tone and store it

CTK7300IN_e.book 52 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using Drawbar Organ Tones

E-53

The table below shows the parameters that can be configured on the drawbar editor screen.

The settings marked with an asterisk (*) in the “Setting Range” column are initial defaults.

• While the drawbar edit screen is displayed, you can change the parameters of drawbar 16' through 1' using sliders D-4 (16')

through D-12 (1').

Drawbar Organ Tone Parameter Settings

Parameter Name Setting Setting Range

Ft16' to Ft1'

(Drawbar 16' to Drawbar 1')

Adjusts a tone’s foot “length” harmonic overtone levels (16' to 1'). 0* to 8

Perc. 2nd

(2nd Overtone Percussion)

When “on”, a percussion sound with 2nd harmonic (2nd) or 3rd harmonic

(3rd) pitch is applied to notes.*1

oFF*, on

Perc. 3rd

(3rd Overtone Percussion)

oFF*, on

Perc.Decay

(Percussion Decay Time)

Specifies the decay time of percussion sound. A larger value specifies a

longer decay time.

000* to 127

On Click

(Key On Click)

When “on”, a click is sounded when a note starts to sound. oFF*, on

Off Click

(Key Off Click)

When “on”, a click sound is added when a keyboard key is released. oFF*, on

Type

(Wave Type)

“Sin” (Sine) is a waveform that does not include noise, while “Vin”

(Vintage) is a waveform that includes characteristic noise of an electric

organ.

Sin*, Vin

Vib.Rate

(Vibrato Rate)

Specifies the speed of the vibrato applied to a note. 000 to 64* to 127

Vib.Depth

(Vibrato Depth)

Specifies how much vibrato is applied to a note. 000* to 127

DSP On Off

Rot Button Off Value

For information about these parameters, see the items starting from “DSP On Off (DSP On/

Off)” under “Tone Parameter Settings” (pages E-48 through E-49).

*1 Makes sustained tones more lively. A percussion sound is sounded at its strongest immediately after a keyboard key is

pressed, and then gradually decays in accordance with the “Perc.Decay” setting. Though keeping keyboard keys depressed

will continue to sound organ notes, only the percussion sound decays.

CTK7300IN_e.book 53 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-54

Music Presets

Music presets provide one-touch access to Auto

Accompaniment, tone, reverb, and other settings that are

configured in accordance with preset chord progressions. A

total of 305 presets let you easily configure the keyboard for a

wide variety of different musical styles. Chord progressions

include both short loops of a few measures that are great for

improvisation, as well as progressions for entire songs. Chord

progressions are also fun just to listen to.

In addition to built-in presets, you can create your own original

music presets (user presets). You can record chord

progressions up to 999 measures long, which provides plenty

of versatility for long songs.

Music presets are divided among six groups, each of which

corresponds to one of the RHYTHM buttons from [A] through

[F]. Groups [A] through [E] are built-in preset groups, while

Group [F] is the user preset group.

Refer to the separate “Appendix” to find the

music preset you want to use, and note its

group and number.

While holding down the L-6 ([D] INDIAN) button,

press the L-7 ([E] PIANO RHYTHMS) button.

• This displays the music preset screen like the one

shown below.

• The D indicator will be flashing on the display.

This indicates that play with a preset chord progression

is enabled.

• Depending on the music preset you selected, the

F, A, or other indicators may also be flashing

or displayed.

R-17R-17

R-13R-13

R-16R-16

C-14C-14

C-10C-10 C-17C-17

R-1

R-12R-1

R-12

R-15R-15

L-15L-15

L-16L-16

L-17L-17

L-14L-14

L-13L-13

R-14R-14

C-11C-11

L-3

L-8L-3

L-8

Using Music Presets To perform using a music preset

Flashing

CTK7300IN_e.book 54 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Music Presets

E-55

Use the buttons from L-3 ([A] POPS/ROCK/

DANCE) to L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS) to select a

music preset group.

• The L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS) button is for the user

preset group. For details, see “Creating a User Preset”

(page E-58).

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to scroll

through the music preset numbers until the one

you want is displayed.

• Tone, rhythm, and other settings will be configured in

accordance with the music preset you selected. For

details about the settings that are configured by a

music preset, see “Music Preset Settings” (page E-56).

What you should do to start your performance

depends on the music preset you selected as

described below.

When the F, E, or H indicator is

flashing on the display:

When the F, E, or H indicator is not

flashing on the display:

Play the melody along with the Auto

Accompaniment.

• The preset chord progression repeats the same

pattern. The number of measures in the progression

depends on the music preset that is selected. Shorter

progressions are made up of two to four measures,

while longer are 30 to 40 measures long. For some

chord progressions, a fill-in pattern will be inserted

automatically at the end of a progression pattern.

• You can change to a different music preset while Auto

Accompaniment play is in progress, or after stopping

your performance in step 7, below. Perform steps 3 and

4 of this procedure to change to another music preset.

If you change to a different music preset while playing,

the change will be executed after playback reaches the

end of the measure you are in when you make the

change.

To stop playing, press the L-15 (SYNCHRO/

ENDING) button or the L-16 (START/STOP)

button.

• The D indicator continues to flash on the display

even after you stop playing. Pressing the L-16 (START/

STOP) button at this time will restart Auto

Accompaniment play.

Press the R-15 (EXIT) button to exit the music

preset screen.

• You also can press the R-15 (EXIT) button while Auto

Accompaniment play is in progress. In this case, play

will stop and the music preset screen will be exited as

soon as you press the R-15 (EXIT) button.

• Instead of using the preset chord progression, you also can

use the chord keyboard (page E-26) to play Auto

Accompaniment chords, and you also can play with the

rhythm only. For details, see “To change music preset Auto

Accompaniment settings” (page E-57).

• During play using a music preset, you can change tone,

rhythm, tempo, mixer, effect, and other settings.

3The flashing indicator means that the Digital Keyboard

is in synchro standby. Press a key in the chord

keyboard to the left of the split point (page E-17). This

will start Auto Accompaniment play along with the

chord progression.

3Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button. This will start

Auto Accompaniment play along with the chord

progression.

CTK7300IN_e.book 55 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Music Presets

E-56

The settings listed in the table below are recalled when a music preset is selected.

• Except for the chord progression, all of the settings can be modified after a music preset is selected. Refer to the information

noted in the “Go here for more information” column of the table for details about modifying a particular setting.

• Selecting a different music preset or exiting the music preset screen clears any modifications you make in the currently selected

preset. If you want to retain modified settings for later use, you can save them as a user preset. For details, see “Creating a User

Preset” (page E-58).

• If you change to a different music preset while a music preset is playing, changes in rhythm and tempo will be executed after the

measure you are in when you make the change is complete.

• Though you cannot modify the chord progression of a music preset, you can modify the preset chord progression and save it as

a user preset. For details, see “Creating a User Preset” (page E-58).

Music Preset Settings

Setting Go here for more information

Tones for the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and LOWER parts Layering and Splitting Tones (page E-15)

Layer on/off, split on/off

Octave shift for the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and LOWER parts Using Octave Shift (page E-18)

Reverb on/off and type To add reverb to sounds (page E-31)

Auto harmonize tones Using the Mixer (page E-36), Part Parameters (page E-43)

Volume of the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER, and auto

harmonize parts

Part on/off

Auto harmonize or arpeggiator on/off and type Using Auto Harmonize (page E-28), Playing Arpeggio Phrases

Automatically (Arpeggiator) (page E-23)

Arpeggiator hold, arpeggiator speed, arpeggiator part Function Menu Settings (page E-131)

Rhythm To change the rhythm while using a music preset (page E-57)

Synchro start type (normal, intro, variation) Playing an Auto Accompaniment (page E-24)

Tempo To change the tempo setting (page E-19)

Chord progression –

CTK7300IN_e.book 56 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Music Presets

E-57

While the music preset screen is displayed, you can use the

L-17 (ACCOMP ON/OFF) button to change Auto

Accompaniment settings.

• Each press of the L-17 (ACCOMP ON/OFF) button cycles

through settings as shown below.

• When a preset chord progression or accompaniment off is

selected, the keyboard can be used for melody play. When

accompaniment on is selected, the left side range of the

keyboard is the chord keyboard, and the right side range is

the melody keyboard.

While the music preset screen is displayed, buttons L-3 ([A]

POPS/ROCK/DANCE) to L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS) function

as music preset group select buttons. Because of this, you

need to perform the procedure below to change the rhythm.

Press the R-17 (y) button twice.

• This displays a rhythm selection screen like the one

shown below.

Use the buttons from L-3 ([A] POPS/ROCK/

DANCE) to L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS) to select a

rhythm group.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to scroll

through the rhythm numbers until the one you

want is displayed.

After selecting the rhythm you want, press the

R-15 (EXIT) button or press the R-17 (t) button

twice.

• This exits the rhythm selection screen.

• Pressing a button from R-1 ([A] PIANO) through R-12 ([L]

DRAWBAR ORGAN) while a music preset is in use will

display the tone selection screen. While the tone selection

screen is displayed, pressing the R-17 (y) button once will

change to the rhythm selection screen shown in the

procedure above.

To change music preset Auto

Accompaniment settings

Setting

Preset chord progression Flashing

Normal Auto Accompaniment

(Accompaniment Off) Not displayed

Normal Auto Accompaniment

(Accompaniment On) Displayed

D indicator

To change the rhythm while using a music

preset

CTK7300IN_e.book 57 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Music Presets

E-58

Preset areas numbered F:001 through F:100 are for storage

of user presets. You can have up to 100 user presets stored in

memory at one time. You can recall a stored user preset after

pressing the L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS) button. See “To

perform using a music preset” (page E-54) for more

information.

Perform steps 1 through 4 under “To perform

using a music preset” (page E-54) and select

the music preset you want to edit in order to

create your user music preset.

Configure tone and other settings referring to

“Music Preset Settings” (page E-56).

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays the MP (music preset) editor screen like

the one shown below.

• Pressing the R-16 (ENTER) button here will change to

a screen for editing the chord progression. See “Editing

a Chord Progression” (page E-62) for more information.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“Parameter” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the parameter menu.

You can change each of the parameters on the

parameter menu as required.

Creating a User Preset

User Preset Numbers

To create and save a user preset

(1) Use the R-17 (t, y, u, i) buttons to move the 0

to the parameter you want to change.

(2) Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting value.

• Pressing the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time

returns a parameter to its initial default setting.

• The following explains the meanings and setting

ranges of the on-screen items. The settings marked

with an asterisk (*) in the “Setting Range” column

are initial defaults.

Item name Description Setting

Range

Synchro

(Synchro type)

Specifies the Auto

Accompaniment synchro

start standby type.

oFF, Normal*,

Variation,

Intro

IntroChd

(Intro chord)

Specifies the chords of the

Auto Accompaniment intro

pattern.

C* - B,

Cm - Bm

EndingChd

(Ending chord)

Specifies the chords of the

Auto Accompaniment

ending pattern.

C* - B,

Cm - Bm

AutoFill

(Auto fill in)

Specifies whether a fill in

should be inserted (on) or

not inserted (oFF) at the

end of the chord

progression.

on*, oFF

Timing

(Timing set)

Specifies the chord change

timing during playback for

recorded chords. For

information about

differences in playback for

each setting value, see

“Timing Setting and Chord

Progression Playback”

(page E-60).

Normal*, Half,

Double, 3/4,

3/2

(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) as required.

(4) After the settings are the way you want, press the R-15

(EXIT) button.

• This returns to the MP editor screen.

CTK7300IN_e.book 58 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Music Presets

E-59

Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to

“Store” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays a screen for specifying the destination

user preset number and name.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select the

destination user preset number you want.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the

cursor to the name character position you want

to change, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)

buttons to select the character you want.

• For details about the characters you can input, see

“Supported Input Characters” (page E-160).

• To input a space, press both of the R-14 (–, +) buttons

at the same time.

After everything is the way you want, press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This saves the data.

• If the user preset number where you are saving the

data already has data saved to it, a message

(Replace?) will appear on the display to confirm

whether you want to replace the existing data with the

new data. Press the R-14 (YES) button to replace the

existing data with the new data.

• The message “Please Wait” will remain on the display

while a data save operation is in progress. Do not

perform any other operation while it is displayed.

Turning off the Digital Keyboard or removing the

memory card can cause Digital Keyboard data to be

deleted or become corrupted. It also can cause the

Digital Keyboard to fail to turn on when the L-1 (P)

button is pressed. If this happens, refer to

“Troubleshooting” (page E-150).

• Pressing the R-15 (EXIT) button in place of step 6 displays

the confirmation screen shown below. Pressing the R-14

(YES) button at this time will display the user preset save

screen in step 6.

To cancel the editor operation without saving the edited

results, press the R-14 (NO) button.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button to display

the MP (music preset) editor screen.

Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to

“Clear” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays a screen for specifying the number of the

user preset you want to clear.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the

number of the user preset you want to clear.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to clear or

the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

User preset name

Save destination user preset number

To clear user preset data

CTK7300IN_e.book 59 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Music Presets

E-60

This section explains how chord progressions are played in accordance with the “Timing” (Timing set) settings in step 5 under “To

create and save a user preset” (page E-58). Note that this setting affects playback only. It does not change the chord progression

data.

•Normal

Plays chords at the same timing as the recording.

•Half

Plays chords measure-by-measure at a timing that is half that of the recording.

Example:

The following shows what happens when the “Half” setting is used to play back a user preset that was created based on a music

preset whose rhythm is a 4/4 time.

Half Playback when a 4/4 time rhythm is assigned to the user preset

Half Playback when a 2/4 time rhythm is assigned to the user preset

• Double

Plays chords measure-by-measure at a timing that is double that of the recording.

Playing back a chord progression like that shown for “Half” above while “Double” is specified results in the progression shown

below.

Double Playback when a 4/4 time rhythm is assigned to the user preset

Double Playback when an 8/4 time rhythm is assigned to the user preset

Timing Setting and Chord Progression Playback

1 2 3 4

Dm A7

1 2 3 4

Dm G7

1 2 3 4

C EM7

1 2 3 4

Am C7

Measure

Beat

Chord progression

1 2 3 4

Dm A7

1 2 3 4

Dm G7

1 2 3 4

C EM7

1 2 3 4

Am C7

Measure

Beat

Chord progression

1 2 1 2

Dm A7

1 2 1 2

C EM7Dm G7 Am C7

324

Measure

Beat

Chord progression

1 2 3 4

Measure

Beat

Chord progression

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

1 2

Measure

Beat

Chord progression

CTK7300IN_e.book 60 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Music Presets

E-61

•3/4

Plays chords measure-by-measure at a timing that is 3/4 times that of the recording. This setting is best for use with a 6/8 time

rhythm.

Playing back a chord progression like that shown for “Half” above while “3/4” is specified results in the progression shown below.

3/4 Playback when a 4/4 time rhythm is assigned to the user preset

3/4 Playback when a 6/8 time rhythm is assigned to the user preset

•3/2

Plays chords measure-by-measure at a timing that is 3/2 times that of the recording. This setting is best for use with a 6/4 time

rhythm.

Playing back a chord progression like that shown for “Half” above while “3/2” is specified results in the progression shown below.

3/2 Playback when a 4/4 time rhythm is assigned to the user preset

3/2 Playback when a 6/4 time rhythm is assigned to the user preset

• When “Double” or “3/2” is selected, chord timing is shifted to a later timing. Any chords that do not fit within a measure are not

played.

1 2 3 4

Dm A7

1 2 3 4

Dm G7

1 2 3 4

C EM7

1 2 3 4

Am C7

Measure

Beat

Chord progression

1 2 3 4

Dm A7 Dm G7 C EM7 Am

5 6 1 2

3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2

Measure

Beat

Chord progression

1 2 3 4

Dm A7

1 2 3 4

Dm G7

1 2 3 4

C EM7

1 2 3 4

Am C7

Measure

Beat

Chord progression

1 2 3 4

Dm A7 Dm G7 C EM7 Am

5 6 1 2

3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2

Measure

Beat

Chord progression

CTK7300IN_e.book 61 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Music Presets

E-62

You can modify the preset chord progression and save it as a

user preset, or you can create a new chord progression from

scratch and save it.

Perform steps 1 through 4 under “To perform

using a music preset” (page E-54) and select

the music preset you want to edit in order to

create your user music preset.

Configure tone and other settings referring to

“Music Preset Settings” (page E-56).

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays the MP (music preset) editor screen like

the one shown below with the 0 next to “Chord Edit”.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This displays the chord editor screen shown below. You

can use this screen to directly edit the individual chord

data items of a chord progression.

Perform the following chord progression

editing operations.

• Change an existing chord (“To modify recorded chord

data”, page E-63)

• Delete an existing chord (“To delete recorded chord

data”, page E-63)

• Insert a new chord (“To insert a new chord”, page E-63)

• Delete all existing chords (“Initialize”, under “To perform

menu operations”, page E-65)

• Input a series of chords (“To perform step input of

chords”, page E-64)

• Key shift all existing chords (“Key Shift”, under “To

perform menu operations”, page E-65)

• Insert another music preset chord progression following

the chord progression data of the preset being edited

(“AppendChord”, under “To perform menu operations”,

page E-65)

• Delete existing chords in a specific measure (“Delete

Measure”, under “To perform menu operations”, page

E-65)

• Insert blank measures at a specific location (“Insert

Measure”, under “To perform menu operations”, page

E-65)

After editing is complete, press the R-15 (EXIT)

button.

• This returns to the MP editor screen.

Perform steps 4 through 9 under “To create and

save a user preset” (page E-58).

• Steps 4 and 5 can be skipped if they are not necessary.

Editing a Chord Progression

Chord Progression Editing Flow

Data being edited

Cursor

Data type name at

cursor position

Data before and after data being edited

CTK7300IN_e.book 62 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Music Presets

E-63

Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure

under “Chord Progression Editing Flow” on

page E-62.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the

cursor to the chord you want to edit.

• You can use the L-14 (dFF) and L-13 (sREW)

buttons to move the cursor by measure-by-measure.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the

cursor, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)

buttons to change the value at the cursor

position.

• The cursor flashes during a value change operation.

• A “tick” is a time unit that is shorter than one beat. With

music preset data, 12 ticks equal one beat. This means

that you can specify a tick value in the range of 00 to

11. A tick value of 12 advances to the next beat. In the

case of 4/4 time, a quarter note (2) is 12 ticks and an

eighth note (6) is 6 ticks.

To apply the changed value, press the R-16

(ENTER) button.

• This causes the cursor to stop flashing.

• You cannot change the timing (Measure:Beat:Tick) of

the first chord of the user preset data.

Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure

under “Chord Progression Editing Flow” on

page E-62.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the

cursor to the chord you want to delete.

Press the C-10 (DELETE) button.

• The chord at the current cursor position will be deleted

as soon as you press the C-10 (DELETE) button.

• You cannot delete the first chord of the user preset

data.

Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure

under “Chord Progression Editing Flow” on

page E-62.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the

cursor to the chord that comes immediately

before the position where you want to insert a

chord.

Press the C-11 (INSERT) button.

• This displays a screen like the one shown below.

To modify recorded chord data

Measure:Beat:Tick

Chord root

Chord type

Cursor

01 02 09 10 1100

Chord progression

Measure 1 Measure 2

Beat 1 Beat 2 Beat 3 Beat 4 Beat 1 Beat 2

Tick

001:1:00 002:1:00

For the sample display above, the chord

change from C to Bm occurs here.

To delete recorded chord data

To insert a new chord

CTK7300IN_e.book 63 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Music Presets

E-64

Specify the location of the new chord insert as a

number of beats after the current cursor

position.

• Except for the R-8 (7) button, pressing the R-4 ( • )

button after you press any one of the above buttons will

increase number of beats by 1.5.

• Pressing the R-10 (,) button after you press any one

of the above buttons will change the number of beats

by 2/3.

• The R-9 (8) and R-11 (.) buttons are disabled

during this step.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This inserts the chord and causes the cursor to appear

at the “ROOT” position of the inserted chord data. The

initial default root setting is C.

Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify

the root.

Use the R-17 (i) button to move the cursor to

“TYPE” position, and then use the dial or R-14

(–, +) buttons to configure the type setting.

• When the cursor is located at “ROOT” or “TYPE”, you

can use the chord keyboard to specify the chord root or

type.

To apply the chord data, press the R-16

(ENTER) button.

• This causes the cursor to stop flashing.

Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure

under “Chord Progression Editing Flow” on

page E-62.

Press the C-14 (STEP) button.

• This will display a step screen like the one shown

below.

Use the L-14 (dFF) and L-13 (sREW)

buttons to move the cursor to the location from

which you want to perform step input.

• The cursor will move in one-measure steps.

Specify the length of the chord you want to

input.

• For information about how to do this, see the table in

step 4 under “To insert an event” (page E-94).

• The R-9 (8) button is disabled during this step. Also

note that you cannot specify a dotted 16th note.

Press the keyboard keys that correspond to the

chord you want to input.

• Press keyboard keys in accordance with the current

chord fingering mode. For details, see “Selecting a

Chord Fingering Mode” (page E-26).

• The chord is input as soon as you press the keyboard

key, and the cursor will move by the length you

specified in step 4 to the next measure:beat:tick. From

there you can input the next chord, if you want.

• You cannot input more than 999 measures here.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 to input the chords you

want.

• If you want to input a series of chords of the same

length, skip step 4 and perform step 5 only.

When you are finished with step input, press

the R-15 (EXIT) button twice.

To specify this number of beats

after the current cursor position: Press this button:

4 beats R-1 (5)

2 beats R-2 (1)

1 beat R-3 (2)

1/2 beat R-7 (6)

1/4 beat R-8 (7)

To perform step input of chords

CTK7300IN_e.book 64 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Music Presets

E-65

Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure

under “Chord Progression Editing Flow” on

page E-62.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button.

This displays a screen like the one shown

below.

Execute the desired menu operation.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to execute

the operation you performed in step 4 or the

R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

• Pressing the R-14 (YES) button starts the process. The

message “Please Wait” will remain on the display if the

process takes time to perform. Do not perform any

operation while this message is on the display.

To perform menu operations

To do this: Do this:

Delete all existing

chords

(Initialize)*1

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0

to “Initialize” and then press the R-16

(ENTER) button.

Key shift all existing

chords

(Key Shift)

1. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the

0 to “Key Shift” and then press the R-16

(ENTER) button.

2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to

specify how much you want to shift the key.

• You can specify a value from –5 to +6.

3. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

Insert another music

preset chord

progression

following the chord

progression data of

the preset being

edited

(AppendChord)*2

1. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the

0 to “AppendChord” and then press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to scroll

through the music preset numbers until the

one you want is displayed, and then press

the R-16 (ENTER) button.

Delete existing

chords in a specific

measure

(Delete Measure)*3

1. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the

0 to “DeleteMeas.” and then press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to

specify the start measure of the delete

operation.

3. Press the R-17 (y) button to move the

thick brackets (%) to “Size”.

4. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to

specify the number of measures you want

to delete.

5. After everything is the way you want, press

the R-16 (ENTER) button.

Insert blank

measures at a

specific location

(Insert Measure)*2

1. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the

0 to “InsertMeas.” and then press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to

specify the start measure of the insert

operation.

3. Press the R-17 (y) button to move the

thick brackets (%) to “Size”.

4. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to

specify the number of measures you want

to insert.

5. After everything is the way you want, press

the R-16 (ENTER) button.

*1 Deletes all existing chords, and replaces it with four

measures of data with a C-chord at the first beat of the first

measure (user preset initial data).

*2 You will not be able to execute this operation if the number

of measures specified exceeds 999.

*3 You cannot delete all measures. If you specify range that

includes all of the measures, the first measure will remain

without being deleted.

CTK7300IN_e.book 65 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-66

Saving Keyboard Setups to Registration Memory

Registration memory lets you store Digital Keyboard setups

(tone, rhythm, etc.) for instant recall whenever you need them.

• For information about items that can be part of a

registration setup, see “Parameter List” (page E-162).

• When recalling a registration setup, you can recall only the

setting items related to accompaniments, or only the setting

items related to scales. For more information, see

“RegFltAcmp (Registration Filter: Accompaniment)” (page

E-133) and “RegFltScal (Registration Filter: Scale)” (page

E-133).

You can have up to 96 setups in registration memory at one

time. The C-10 (BANK) and C-11 (1) to C-16 (6) buttons are

used for selecting bank and area.

• Each press of the C-10 (BANK) button cycles through the

bank numbers, from 1 to 16.

• Pressing a button from C-11 (1) to C-16 (6) selects the

corresponding area in the currently selected bank.

■Registration Save Example

This example saves the data shown in the table below to the

following setups in Bank 1.

• Initial melody setup saved to Setup 1-1.

• Second melody setup saved to Setup 1-2.

• Third melody setup saved to Setup 1-3.

C-14C-14C-13C-13 C-16C-16C-11C-11

C-12C-12C-10C-10 C-15C-15 C-17C-17

L-1L-1

R-14R-14

Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Area 5 Area 6

Bank 1 Setup

1-1

Setup

1-2

Setup

1-3

Setup

1-4

Setup

1-5

Setup

1-6

Bank 2 Setup

2-1

Setup

2-2

Setup

2-3

Setup

2-4

Setup

2-5

Setup

2-6

•

Bank 16 Setup

16-1

Setup

16-2

Setup

16-3

Setup

16-4

Setup

16-5

Setup

16-6

Setup 1-1 Setup 1-2 Setup 1-3

Tone Number E:016 H:001 A:001

Rhythm Number A:015 E:013 A:044

Tempo 080 140 089

C-10 C-11 C-12 C-13 C-14 C-15 C-16

CTK7300IN_e.book 66 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Saving Keyboard Setups to Registration Memory

E-67

Configure the tone, rhythm, and other settings

you want to include in the setup.

Press the C-10 (BANK) button to select the bank

you want.

• Each press of the C-10 (BANK) button cycles through

the bank numbers.

• While the “BANK” screen is displayed after pressing the

C-10 (BANK) button, use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons

to select the bank you want.

• If you do not perform any operation for a few seconds,

the display will return to previous screen automatically.

While holding down the C-17 (STORE) button,

press a button from C-11 (1) to C-16 (6) to select

an area.

• This will save the settings you configured in step 1 into

the applicable setup.

• If there is anything already stored in the setup, it will be

replaced (deleted) with the new setup.

• The message “Please Wait” will remain on the display

while a data save operation is in progress. Do not

perform any other operation while it is displayed.

Turning off the Digital Keyboard or removing the

memory card can cause Digital Keyboard data to be

deleted or become corrupted. It also can cause the

Digital Keyboard to fail to turn on when the L-1 (P)

button is pressed. If this happens, refer to

“Troubleshooting” (page E-150).

Press the C-10 (BANK) button to select the bank

that contains the setup you want to recall.

Use buttons C-11 (1) to C-16 (6) to select the

area that contains the setup you want to recall.

• This will recall the registration memory setup and

automatically configure the Digital Keyboard settings

accordingly.

• Notes currently being sounded by the keyboard may stop if

you recall a setup that causes a change in octave shift

(page E-18). To keep this from happening, either select a

setup that does not cause a change in the octave shift

setting, or hold down the pedal (which will cause notes

currently being played to be sustained).

To save a setup to registration

memory

Bank 2 selected

Registered as Setup 2-1

To recall a setup from registration

memory

Setup 6-1 recalled

CTK7300IN_e.book 67 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-68

Using the Song Sequencer

You can use the song sequencer to record keyboard play

(including Auto Accompaniment), or to record individual parts

(multi-track recording) and combine them into a final song.

After recording data, you can edit each individual note (event).

You can have up to five recorded songs (approximately

30,000 notes total) stored in memory at the same time.

• The message “Please Wait” will remain on the display

while a data save operation is in progress. Do not

perform any other operation while it is displayed.

Turning off the Digital Keyboard or removing the

memory card can cause Digital Keyboard data to be

deleted or become corrupted. It also can cause the

Digital Keyboard to fail to turn on when the L-1 (P)

button is pressed. If this happens, refer to

“Troubleshooting” (page E-150).

EASY REC lets you start recording of keyboard play with a

single button operation.

• EASY REC is a function of the song sequencer. For details

on using the song sequencer, see “What you can do with

the song sequencer” (page E-70).

• EASY REC can be used to record keyboard play that uses

a music preset (page E-54). For details, see “To use EASY

REC to record a performance using a music preset” (page

E-70).

Configure Digital Keyboard settings for your

performance.

• Configure the following settings: tone and rhythm

selection, tempo, layer and split, synchro standby

(when using Auto Accompaniment), mixer, etc. For

details about settings that can be configured, see

“Recording Start” under “System Track and Track 01

through 16 Common Recording Content” (page E-71)

and “System Track Recording Content” (page E-71).

• Performing step 2 below enters record standby. After

that, recording will start whenever you play something

on the keyboard. After step 2, take care that you do not

accidentally press a keyboard key and unintentionally

start recording.

C-14C-14C-13C-13C-11C-11

C-12C-12C-10C-10L-12L-12 C-17C-17L-16L-16L-14L-14

L-13L-13

R-1

R-12R-1

R-12

R-15R-15

R-17R-17

R-13R-13

R-16R-16

R-14R-14

C-7C-7

C-4C-4

C-3C-3

L-15L-15

L-1L-1

Starting One-touch Recording

(EASY REC)

To use EASY REC to record

CTK7300IN_e.book 68 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-69

Press the C-3 (RECORD) button.

• The button will start flashing and the EASY REC screen

shown below will appear on the display.

• An asterisk (*) next to a song area number indicates

that there is already data recorded in that area.

Selecting a song area that already contains recorded

data and starting a new recording will cause the

existing system track data to be deleted.

Perform the following steps to configure beat

and other settings.

Start playing something on the keyboard.

• Recording starts automatically when you perform any

one of the following operations.

• Starting recording will cause the C-3 (RECORD) button

to change from flashing to lit. During recording, the

display will show the current measure (MEASURE) and

beat (BEAT).

•PITCH BEND wheel (S-1) and pedal operations are

also recorded.

• When recording reaches a point where there is less

than 100 notes of remaining memory capacity, the

current measure (MEASURE) and beat (BEAT) values

will start flashing.

To stop recording, press the L-16 (START/

STOP) button.

• After recording stops, the initial song sequencer mode

screen appears on the display.

• At this time you can press the L-16 (START/STOP)

button to replay what you have just recorded. For

details about playing back recorded content, see

“Playing a Recorded Song” (page E-79).

To exit the song sequencer, press the C-4

(SONG SEQUENCER) button or the R-15 (EXIT)

button.

(1) While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button,

press the C-17 (MENU) button.

This will display a menu like the one shown below,

with the 0 next to “Beat” (beat).

(2) Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to configure the

beat setting.

You can specify a beat setting of 2/4 to 8/4, 2/8 to

16/8.

(3) Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to

“Metronome” and then use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to

turn the metronome on or off.

Turning on the metronome causes it to sound a count

during recording, but not during playback.

Song area number

Arrows (e) will indicate all the parts in Group A. This indicates the

Digital Keyboard is currently in system track (page E-70) record

standby.

(4) Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to “Precount”

and then use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to turn the

precount on or off.

Turing on the precount inserts a one-measure count

before the start of recording when you press the L-16

(START/STOP) button in step 4.

(5) Press the R-15 (EXIT) button to exit the menu.

– Playing on the keyboard

– Pressing the L-12 (INTRO), L-13 (NORMAL/

FILL-IN), or L-14 (VARIATION/FILL-IN) button

– Pressing the L-16 (START/STOP) button. To input

one or more rests before starting recording, press the

L-16 (START/STOP) button to start recording, and

then start keyboard play at the point you want.

CTK7300IN_e.book 69 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-70

Perform steps 1 through 4 under “To perform

using a music preset” (page E-54).

Press the C-3 (RECORD) button.

• The button will start flashing and the EASY REC screen

will appear on the display.

Start to play something using a music preset.

For details, see “To perform using a music

preset” (page E-54).

• This will start recording, along with Auto

Accompaniment in accordance with the preset chord

progression.

• Starting recording will cause the C-3 (RECORD) button

to change from flashing to lit. During recording, the

display will show the current measure (MEASURE) and

beat (BEAT).

To stop recording, press the L-16 (START/

STOP) button.

• After recording stops, the initial song sequencer mode

screen appears on the display.

• At this time you can press the L-16 (START/STOP)

button to replay what you have just recorded. For

details about playing back recorded content, see

“Playing a Recorded Song” (page E-79).

To exit the song sequencer, press the C-4

(SONG SEQUENCER) button or the R-15 (EXIT)

button.

The simplest use of the song sequencer is to record a

performance as you play it. For details, see “To use EASY

REC to record” (page E-68). Virtually everything you play on

the keyboard can be recorded by the song sequencer.

You also can use the song sequencer to perform multi-track

recording of 17 different tracks and assemble them into a final

song. For example, you can first record a piano track, followed

by a bass track, then a guitar track or tracks that feature other

musical instruments.

A single song can be made up of up to 17 tracks. The 17

tracks are broken down as shown in the table below.

• The Digital Keyboard uses multiple parts simultaneously to

sound Auto Accompaniment, a keyboard layer tone, and

keyboard split tone at the same time. The system track is

used to record the notes of these parts in a single location.

• Tracks 01 through 16 each correspond to a single musical

instrument part. Each track is used to record the notes of

each individual part.

• The parts shown in the table above correspond to mixer

parts. For details, see “Using the Mixer” (page E-36).

• Part B10 is a drum sound only part.

To use EASY REC to record a performance

using a music preset What you can do with the song

sequencer

Songs, tracks, and parts

Song

Track Part

Number Part Contents

System

Track

A04 Auto Accompaniment (Auto

harmonize tone)

A05 Keyboard (UPPER 1 part)

A06 Keyboard (UPPER 2 part)

A07 Keyboard (LOWER part)

A09 Auto Accompaniment

(Percussion part)

A10 Auto Accompaniment

(Drums part)

A11 Auto Accompaniment

(Bass part)

A12 Auto Accompaniment

(Chord 1 part)

A13 Auto Accompaniment

(Chord 2 part)

A14 Auto Accompaniment

(Chord 3 part)

A15 Auto Accompaniment

(Chord 4 part)

A16 Auto Accompaniment

(Chord 5 part)

Track 01

Track 16

B01

B16

Keyboard (B01 part)

Keyboard (B16 part)

CTK7300IN_e.book 70 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-71

■Recording Start

• Beat setting

•Rhythm selection

• Tempo setting

• Scale setting

• The mixer settings below

– All part parameters from A04 through A07 and B01

through B16 (Excluding part on/off)

– Part parameters from A09 through A16: part on/off,

coarse tune, fine tune, scale enable, DSP line

– DSP parameters: volume, pan, reverb send

• Effect settings

• Accomp volume

■During Recording

• Keyboard play

• Pitch bender operations

• Pedal operations

• The button operations below

S-2 (MODULATION), D-1 (ROTARY SLOW/FAST),

D-2 (PERCUSSION SECOND),

D-3 (PERCUSSION THIRD)

•D-4 (16') through D-12 (1') slider operations

■Recording Start

• Tones for the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and LOWER parts

• Layer and split on/off

• Split point setting

• Octave shift for the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and LOWER parts

• The function menu item settings below (page E-131)

– Arpeggiator hold, arpeggiator speed, arpeggiator part

• Auto harmonize or arpeggiator on/off and type

• Synchro standby (Normal, Variation, Intro)

• Music preset (Only when using EASY REC.)

■During Recording

•Rhythm selection

• Tempo setting

• All of the items under “Recording Start” above, except for

the function menu item settings and split point setting

• Chord play using the chord keyboard

• The rhythm controller operations below

L-12 (INTRO), L-13 (NORMAL/FILL-IN),

L-14 (VARIATION/FILL-IN), and L-15 (SYNCHRO/

ENDING) button operations

• Settings recalled from registration memory

• Settings recalled using One Touch Preset

• Due to the way song parts are configured, settings

configured by a recalled registration are applied to different

numbered parts than they were assigned to when the setup

was saved, as shown below.

For details about the configuration of song parts, see

“Songs, tracks, and parts” (page E-70).

• The moment you call up a registration setup or One Touch

Preset while recording, the setting information registered

with the registration setup or One Touch Preset is recorded

to the system track. The registration setup or One Touch

Preset itself is not recorded.

■Recording Start

• Part tone selection for the track

■During Recording

• Part tone selection for the track

• The mixer settings below

– All part parameters from B01 through B16

(except part on/off)

Before starting recording with the song sequencer, you need

to select the tone and rhythm, and also configure other

settings such as tempo, mixer settings, etc. These are called

“panel settings” because they are configured using the Digital

Keyboard’s control panel. When you start recording, panel

settings are stored in the header of the song. Settings in the

header of a song are called “header settings”.

• The “Recording Start” settings under “System Track and

Track 01 through 16 Common Recording Content” (page

E-71), “System Track Recording Content” (page E-71) and

“Track 01 through 16 Recording Content” (page E-71) are

stored as header settings.

• Only header settings can be changed after song recording

is complete. For details, see “Using Panel Record to

Rewrite Song Header Settings” (page E-78).

System Track and Track 01 through 16

Common Recording Content

System Track Recording Content

Parts when registration

setup is saved

Parts when registration is

recalled for song recording

UPPER 1 part (A01) UPPER 1 part (A05)

UPPER 2 part (A02) UPPER 2 part (A06)

LOWER part (A03) LOWER part (A07)

Auto Harmonize tone part

(A04)

Auto Harmonize tone part

(A04)

Track 01 through 16 Recording Content

Panel Settings and Header Settings

CTK7300IN_e.book 71 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-72

This section explains how to record to the system track and

how to record to Tracks 01 through 16. For details about track

configuration and what is recorded to each track, see “What

you can do with the song sequencer” (page E-70).

Press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to

enter the song sequencer mode.

• An asterisk (*) next to a song area number indicates

that there is already data recorded in that area.

•L in the level meter indicates that the system track is

currently selected, while M indicates that another track

(01 through 16) is selected. In the case of M, a pointer

(e) indicates which track is selected.

• A black box ( ) in the level meter above a track

number indicates that there is already data recorded in

that track.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a

song area number.

• Selecting a song area that already contains recorded

data will immediately recall the header settings of the

song (page E-71).

Press the C-3 (RECORD) button.

• The button will start to flash and the Digital Keyboard

will enter record standby, which means recording will

start whenever you play something on the keyboard.

Up to step 7, take care that you do not accidentally

press a keyboard key and unintentionally start

recording.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the

system track.

• If the system track already contains recorded data,

starting recording in step 7 below will cause the current

system track data to be deleted.

Configure panel settings as required for your

performance.

• Configure the following settings: tone and rhythm

selection, tempo, layer and split, synchro standby

(when using Auto Accompaniment), mixer, etc. For

details about settings that can be configured, see

“Recording Start” under “System Track and Track 01

through 16 Common Recording Content” (page E-71)

and “System Track Recording Content” (page E-71).

For information about mixer settings, see “Mixer

Settings in the Song Sequencer Mode” (page E-76).

Perform the following steps to configure beat

and other settings.

Recording Individual Tracks

To record a performance to the system track

Song area number

(1) While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button,

press the C-17 (MENU) button.

This will display a menu like the one shown below, with

the 0 next to “Beat” (beat).

(2) Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to configure the

beat setting.

You can specify a beat setting of 2/4 to 8/4, 2/8 to 16/8.

(3) Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to

“Metronome” and then use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to

turn the metronome on or off.

Turning on the metronome causes it to sound a count

during recording, but not during playback.

(4) Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to “Precount”

and then use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to turn the

precount on or off.

Turing on the precount inserts a one-measure count

before the start of recording when you press the L-16

(START/STOP) button in step 7.

(5) Press the R-15 (EXIT) button to exit the menu.

CTK7300IN_e.book 72 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-73

• Page 2 of the menu screen has a “RecType” setting, but

this setting cannot be used when recording a performance

to the system track.

Start playing something on the keyboard.

• Recording starts automatically when you perform any

one of the following operations.

• Starting recording will cause the C-3 (RECORD) button

to change from flashing to lit. During recording, the

display will show the current measure (MEASURE) and

beat (BEAT).

•PITCH BEND wheel (S-1) and pedal operations are

also recorded.

• When recording reaches a point where there is less

than 100 notes of remaining memory capacity, the

current measure (MEASURE) and beat (BEAT) values

will start flashing.

To stop recording, press the L-16 (START/

STOP) button.

• At this time you can press the L-16 (START/STOP)

button to replay what you have just recorded. For

details about playing back recorded content, see

“Playing a Recorded Song” (page E-79).

To exit the song sequencer, press the C-4

(SONG SEQUENCER) button or the R-15 (EXIT)

button.

Press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to

enter the song sequencer mode.

• An asterisk (*) next to a song area number indicates

that there is already data recorded in that area.

•L in the level meter indicates that the system track is

currently selected, while M indicates that another track

(01 through 16) is selected. In the case of M, which

track is selected is indicated by the position of a pointer

(e).

• A black box ( ) in the level meter above a track

number indicates that there is already data recorded in

that track.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a

song area number.

• Selecting a song area that already contains recorded

data will immediately recall the header settings of the

song (page E-71).

Press the C-3 (RECORD) button.

• The button will start to flash and the Digital Keyboard

will enter record standby, which means recording will

start whenever you play something on the keyboard.

Up to step 7, take care that you do not accidentally

press a keyboard key and unintentionally start

recording.

– Playing on the keyboard

– Pressing the L-12 (INTRO), L-13 (NORMAL/

FILL-IN), or L-14 (VARIATION/FILL-IN) button

– Pressing the L-16 (START/STOP) button. To input

one or more rests before starting recording, press the

L-16 (START/STOP) button to start recording, and

then start keyboard play at the point you want.

To record to Tracks 01 through 16

Song area number

CTK7300IN_e.book 73 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-74

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select a track

(Track 01 through Track 16).

Configure panel settings as required for your

performance.

• Configure the following settings: tone selection, tempo,

mixer settings, etc. For details about settings that can

be configured, see “Recording Start” under “System

Track and Track 01 through 16 Common Recording

Content”* (page E-71) and “Track 01 through 16

Recording Content” (page E-71). For information about

mixer settings, see “Mixer Settings in the Song

Sequencer Mode” (page E-76).

Perform the following steps to configure beat

and other settings.

Start playing something on the keyboard.

• This will start recording and cause the C-3 (RECORD)

button to change from flashing to lit. During recording,

the display will show the current measure (MEASURE)

and beat (BEAT).

• To input one or more rests before starting recording,

press the L-16 (START/STOP) button to start

recording, and then start keyboard play at the point you

want.

•PITCH BEND wheel (S-1) and pedal operations are

also recorded.

• When recording reaches a point where there is less

than 100 notes of remaining memory capacity, the

current measure (MEASURE) and beat (BEAT) values

will start flashing.

To stop recording, press the L-16 (START/

STOP) button.

• At this time you can press the L-16 (START/STOP)

button to replay what you have just recorded. For

details about playing back recorded content, see

“Playing a Recorded Song” (page E-79).

To exit the song sequencer, press the C-4

(SONG SEQUENCER) button or the R-15 (EXIT)

button.

*Excluding rhythm selection and accomp volume.

(1) While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button,

press the C-17 (MENU) button.

This will display a menu like the one shown below, with

the 0 next to “Beat” (beat).

(2) Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to configure the beat

setting.

You can specify a beat setting of 2/4 to 8/4, 2/8 to 16/8.

(3) Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to

“Metronome” and then use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to

turn the metronome on or off.

Turning on the metronome causes it to count a count

during recording, but not during playback.

(4) Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to “Precount”

and then use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to turn the

precount on or off.

Turing on the precount inserts a one-measure count

before the start of recording when you press the L-16

(START/STOP) button in step 7.

(5) Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to “RecType”,

and then use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select “REPL”

or “OVDB”.

When you want to perform this type

of recording:

Select this

RecType option:

Delete any data currently existing in

the track being recorded to and start a

new recording.

REPL (Replace)

Overdub any data currently existing in

the track being recorded to with the

new recording.

OVDB (Overdub)

(6) Press the R-15 (EXIT) button to exit the menu.

CTK7300IN_e.book 74 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-75

While the song sequencer mode initial screen is

on the display after track recording is complete,

hold down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you

press the C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays the song sequencer menu with the 0

located at “ClearTrack”.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This causes the “Clear Track” screen to appear. At this

time the target track for the clear operation is the one

you just recorded.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This will cause the confirmation message “Sure?” to

appear.

Press the R-14 (YES) button to clear the track

data or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

• For information on how to select a particular track and clear

its content, see “To clear a single track” (page E-85).

While the song sequencer mode initial screen is

on the display after track recording is complete,

hold down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you

press the C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays the song sequencer menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“ClearSong” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This causes the “Clear Song” screen to appear. At this

time the target song for the clear operation is the one

you just recorded.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This will cause the confirmation message “Sure?” to

appear.

Press the R-14 (YES) button to clear the track

data or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

• For information on how to select a particular song and clear

its content, see “To clear a song” (page E-82).

To clear the content of a single track

immediately after recording it

To clear a single song immediately after

recording it

CTK7300IN_e.book 75 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-76

You can access the mixer during playback, playback standby,

or record standby (C-3 (RECORD) button flashing), or while

recording is in progress (C-3 (RECORD) button lit). Press the

C-7 (MIXER) button to display the mixer screen. To return to

the song sequencer mode screen, press the C-7 (MIXER)

button again or press the R-15 (EXIT) button.

The table below shows how mixer parts correspond to song

sequencer parts.

Supported Mixer Operations during Playback or Playback

Standby

All mixer settings can be configured during playback or

playback standby, subject to the following precautions.

• If you want to change mixer settings during playback

standby, change them after selecting the song you want to

play back. If you change mixer settings and then change

the song selection, the header settings of the newly

selected song will be recalled and mixer settings will be

changed accordingly.

• The only mixer settings you can change during playback

standby are those that are included in the song header of

the currently selected song. If mixer settings were changed

part way through when recording the song, the later

recorded mixer settings will supersede any settings you

make during playback standby.

Supported Mixer Operations during Record Standby

The mixer settings for the parts shown below (excluding part

on/off) are supported, depending on the track being recorded

to. Settings are recorded to the header settings (page E-71),

the same way settings are stored when recording is started.

Supported Mixer Operations During Recording

Mixer settings cannot be configured during recording to the

system track.

Configuration of mixer settings (except for part on/off) is

supported for a part (B01 through B16) that corresponds to a

track when recording to any track from 01 through 16 shown.

Any change in a mixer setting on the mixer screen is recorded

as soon as it is made.

For details about mixer functions and operations, see “Using

the Mixer” (page E-36).

You can re-record parts of a song you previously recorded in

order to correct errors, etc. Simply enter the record standby

mode and play back the previously recorded song (punch-in

playback) and then play the new notes when playback

reaches the location of the part you want to change.

Press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to

enter the song sequencer mode.

Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a

song area number.

Press the C-3 (RECORD) button to enter record

standby.

• This causes the button to start flashing.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the track

you want to partially re-record.

Hold down the C-3 (RECORD) button until the

punch-in/punch-out screen shown below

appears.

Mixer Settings in the Song Sequencer Mode

Mixer Song Sequencer

Parts A04 to A07, A09 to A16 System Track

Parts B01 to B16 Tracks 01 through 16

System Track Tracks 01 through 16

A05 (UPPER 1), A06 (UPPER 2),

A07 (LOWER), A04 (Auto

harmonize) parts

Parts corresponding to

each track

(B01 through B16)

Re-recording Part of a Song

(Punch-in Recording)

To start re-recording from a particular

location during playback (Manual Punch-in)

Mistake

Playback

Use punch-in recording to

re-record only this part.

CTK7300IN_e.book 76 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-77

Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button.

• This starts punch-in playback.

• The following operations are supported during punch-in

playback. They help you move to the re-recording start

point quickly and easily.

When playback reaches the point from which

you want to start re-recording, start playing

something on the keyboard.

• Punch-in recording starts the moment you start to play

something on the keyboard.

• Any one of the following also will start punch-in

recording: a pedal or pitch bender operation; changing

the tone setting; changing the rhythm, or tempo

setting*.

• To start punch-in recording without making any change

in the notes played or the settings used, press the C-3

(RECORD) button.

• Starting recording will cause the C-3 (RECORD) button

to light.

• If you want to delete all of the data in the track following the

section you just re-recorded with punch-in recording, press

the C-3 (RECORD) button in place of the L-16 (START/

STOP) button in step 8.

• If you want to cancel punch-in recording and retain the

original track data, hold down the C-3 (RECORD) button

until it becomes unlit.

To stop recording, press the L-16 (START/

STOP) button.

• This will end punch-in recording and cause the C-3

(RECORD) button to become unlit.

• Any previously recorded data in the track that comes

after the point you stopped punch-in recording will

remain in the track.

Play the song and determine what part of what

track you want to re-record.

• For details about play back, see “Playing a Recorded

Song” (page E-79).

• You can specify a specific measure, beat, and tick* for

the start point and the end point of the range to be

re-recorded. Normally, it is probably best to specify the

start of a measure or beat as the start point and end

point. If you want to specify specific ticks, you can

display the track to be re-recorded on the event editor

screen and determine the desired location there. For

details about event editing, see “Editing Events” (page

E-87).

*For details about ticks, see “Reading Event Data”

(page E-88).

Press the C-3 (RECORD) button to enter record

standby.

• This causes the button to start flashing.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the track

you want to partially re-record.

Hold down the C-3 (RECORD) button until the

punch-in/punch-out screen appears. You can

release the button at that time.

Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select

“Auto” for the “Mode” setting.

• This displays a range specification screen like the one

shown below.

To do this: Do this:

Fast Forward Hold down the L-14 (dFF) button.

Fast Backward Hold down the L-13 (sREW)

button.

Pause Press the L-15 (PAUSE) button.

Restart paused

playback.

Press the L-15 (PAUSE) button.

*System track only

To specify the punch-in recording range

before starting (Auto Punch-in)

CTK7300IN_e.book 77 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-78

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the

cursor, use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to

change the value at the cursor position, and

then press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• If you have already specified a range using the locator

screen (page E-80), you can copy that range to this

screen by holding down the L-12 (REPEAT) button.

After specifying the recording start point and

end point, press the L-16 (START/STOP) button.

• This starts punch-in playback. You can perform fast

forward and fast backward operations during punch-in

playback using the operations described in step 6

under “To start re-recording from a particular location

during playback (Manual Punch-in)” (page E-76).

• You can start punch-in playback from one measure

prior to the current recording start point by pressing the

L-12 (REPEAT) button which causes the ?

indicator to appear on the display.

When playback reaches the re-record point you

specified, start playing something on the

keyboard.

• Punch-in recording will start automatically when

playback reaches the record start point you specified.

The C-3 (RECORD) button will light when recording

starts.

• Recording stops and punch-in recording is exited

automatically when the record end point you specified

is reached. At this time the C-3 (RECORD) button will

become unlit.

• If you want to stop recording before the record end

point you specified is reached, press the L-16 (START/

STOP) button. Any previously recorded data in the

track that comes after the point you stopped punch-in

recording will remain in the track.

• When “EOT” (End of Track) is selected for the

recording start point, the start point for punch-in

recording is the end of the track.

• When “OFF” is selected for the recording end point,

punch-in recording will not stop automatically because

no end point is specified. To stop punch-in recording in

this case, press the L-16 (START/STOP) button.

The header of each song contains “header settings”, which

are settings that were in effect on the Digital Keyboard when

recording was performed. You can use a “panel record”

operation to rewrite a song’s header settings with the Digital

Keyboard’s current setup.

The following items are header settings that can be rewritten

using the panel record operation.

• Rhythm selection

• Tempo setting

• Scale setting

• The mixer settings below

– All part parameters from A04 through A07 and B01

through B16 (Excluding part on/off)

– Part parameters from A09 through A16: part on/off,

coarse tune, fine tune, scale enable, DSP line

– DSP parameters: volume, pan, reverb send

• Effect settings

• Accomp volume

• UPPER 1 part tone, UPPER 2 part tone, and LOWER part

tone selections

Press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to

enter the song sequencer mode.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a

song area number.

Configure panel settings so they reflect the

settings you want to write as the header

settings.

• You can configure the following settings: mixer settings,

tempo, system track rhythm, track tone selection, etc.

• To change the system track UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and

LOWER part tones or mixer settings, use the mixer to

change the settings of parts A05 (UPPER 1), A06

(UPPER 2), and A07 (LOWER).

After all of the panels settings are the way you

want, hold the R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you

press the C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays the song sequencer menu.

Recording start point Recording end point

Using Panel Record to Rewrite

Song Header Settings

To perform a panel record operation

CTK7300IN_e.book 78 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-79

Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to

“PanelRecord”.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to execute

the panel record operation or the R-14 (NO)

button to cancel.

This section explains how to perform the following operations

on songs recorded in the song sequencer mode.

• Play a song.

• Fast forward, fast backward, pause, unpause.

• Play a specific part in a song.

• Repeat play a specific section of a song.

• Assign a name to a song.

• Delete a song.

Press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to

enter the song sequencer mode.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a

song area number.

Configure mixer settings, tempo, and other

panel settings you want to use for playback.

• To change the system track UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and

LOWER part tones or mixer settings, use the mixer to

change the settings of parts A05 (UPPER 1), A06

(UPPER 2), and A07 (LOWER).

• The above settings are not required if you want to play

the song as it was recorded.

Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button.

• This starts playback. The following operations are

supported during playback.

• Even while playback is paused, you can still perform

fast forward playback by holding down the L-14

(dFF) button or fast backward playback by holding

down the L-13 (sREW). Releasing either button goes

back into pause.

• While playback is in progress or playback standby, you

can use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the track

you want. Playing keyboard keys sounds the parts that

correspond to the currently selected track (A04 to A07

for the system track).

• Playback stops automatically when it reaches the end

of a song. To stop playback part way through, press the

L-16 (START/STOP) button.

Playing a Recorded Song

To play a recorded song

To do this: Do this:

Fast forward Hold down the L-14 (dFF) button.

Fast backward Hold down the L-13 (sREW) button.

Pause Press the L-15 (PAUSE) button.

Restart paused

playback

Press the L-15 (PAUSE) button.

Perform repeat

playback

Perform steps 3 through 5 under “To

repeat play a specific section of a

song” (page E-144).

CTK7300IN_e.book 79 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-80

Press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to

enter the song sequencer mode.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a

song area number.

Press the C-7 (MIXER) button to display the

mixer screen.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the part

you want to play (A04 through A16, B01 through

B16).

• For example, to play only the melody that was recorded

using the UPPER 1 part and recorded into the system

track, select part A05. For details about the content of

each part, see “How Parts are Organized” (page E-36).

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the thick

brackets (%) to “Part”.

Press the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time.

• This causes the setting to change to “Sol” (Solo).

Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button.

• This starts playback only of the part you selected in

step 4.

• Playback stops automatically when it reaches the end

of a song. To stop playback part way through, press the

L-16 (START/STOP) button.

Hold down the L-12 (REPEAT) button until the

locator screen shown below appears on the

display.

Specify a measure as the start point of the

phrase to be repeat played.

Specify a measure as the end point of the

phrase to be repeat played.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This causes the cursor to stop flashing.

Press the R-15 (EXIT) button to exit the locator

screen.

Perform the following steps to start phrase

repeat play.

To play back a particular part alone To repeat play a specific phrase

(1) Press the R-14 (+) button.

This will input “001:01:00” into the start point input area

(A), and cause the cursor to start to flash.

(2) Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the start

measure number.

(1) Press the R-17 (i) three times to move the cursor to

the end point input area.

Press the R-14 (+) button.

The end point input area (B) initially shows the

measure that is one measure after the start point.

(2) Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the end

measure number.

(1) Press the L-12 (REPEAT) button.

This causes the ? indicator to appear on the

display.

(2) Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button.

The specified phrase plays back in a loop.

Start point input area End point input area

CTK7300IN_e.book 80 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-81

To stop playback, press the L-16 (START/STOP)

button.

• Pressing the R-15 (EXIT) button without pressing the R-16

(ENTER) button in step 4 above will cancel the phrase

setting operation and close the locator screen.

• The start point and end point specified on the locator

screen by the above operation will be displayed as the

initial default values when you display the screen of editing

the next event.

– “To delete all events in a specific range of a track” (page

E-93)

– “To copy the events within a specific range to a desired

location” (page E-94)

– “To quantize all note events within specific range of a

track” (page E-96)

– “To delete all pitch bender events within a specific range

of a track” (page E-97)

This lets you repeat play and check the phrase so you can

perform the above operation to edit it.

The following operations are supported during song editing.

• Deleting a specific song or all songs

• Copying a song from one area to another

• Deleting specific measures from a song

• Inserting blank measures into a song

• Extracting system track recorded content to track 04

through 07 or 09 through 16

• Renaming songs

Press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to

enter the song sequencer mode.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-4 (EDIT) button to display

the edit menu.

Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to

“Song Edit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the song editor menu shown below.

Editing a Song

To start a song editor operation

CTK7300IN_e.book 81 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-82

Perform the procedure under “To start a song

editor operation” on page E-81 to display the

song editor menu, with the 0 located at

“Clear”.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This displays the “Clear Song” screen.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the

song area number you want to clear.

• An asterisk (*) next to a song area number indicates

that there is already data recorded in that area.

• You can select “All” here to clear all songs.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to clear or

the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

Perform the procedure under “To start a song

editor operation” on page E-81 to display the

song editor menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“Copy” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the “Copy Song” screen. At this time the

thick brackets (%) will be located at the “Copy”

setting.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the

song area number you want to copy from.

Press the R-17 (y) button to move the thick

brackets (%) to “To”.

• An asterisk (*) next to a song area number indicates

that there is already data recorded in that area.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the

song area number you want to copy to.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• If the copy destination song area does not contain

recorded data, the copy operation is performed

immediately.

• If the copy destination song area already contains

recorded data, the confirmation message shown below

appears asking if you want to overwrite the existing

data.

Press the R-14 (YES) button to perform the copy

operation and overwrite the existing song or the R-14

(NO) button to cancel.

To clear a song

To copy a song from one area to another

CTK7300IN_e.book 82 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-83

Perform the procedure under “To start a song

editor operation” on page E-81 to display the

song editor menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“DeleteMeas.” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This causes “Delete Measure” screen to appear. At this

time the thick brackets (%) will be located at the

“Measure” setting.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the

song measure you want to delete.

Press the R-17 (y) button to move the thick

brackets (%) to “Size”.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the

number of measures you want to delete.

After everything is the way you want, press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to delete

or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

Perform the procedure under “To start a song

editor operation” on page E-81 to display the

song editor menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“InsertMeas.” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This causes “Insert Measure” screen to appear. At this

time the thick brackets (%) will be located at the

“Measure” setting.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the

song measure number from which you want the

insert to start.

Press the R-17 (y) button to move the thick

brackets (%) to “Size”.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the

number of measures you want to insert.

• For example, specifying 002 for “Measure” and 003 for

“Size” will insert three blank measures in front of song

measure 2.

After everything is the way you want, press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to insert

or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

To delete one or more measures from a song To insert blank measures into a song

CTK7300IN_e.book 83 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-84

As explained in detail under “Songs, tracks, and parts” (page

E-70), the system track is an individual track, while the

keyboard play and Auto Accompaniment data are recorded

individually to multiple parts (A04 through A07, A09 through

A16). The data of these parts is extracted to Tracks 04

through 07 and 09 through 16, with one part corresponding

individually to one track of data. This makes it easy to edit

each accompaniment part individually.

• Performing this operation will delete all data currently

recorded in the system track, except for rotary effect

speed ON/OFF data and tempo data.

• Performing this operation deletes all data currently

recorded in Tracks 04 through 07 and 09 through 16,

and overwrites it with the data in the system track.

Perform the procedure under “To start a song

editor operation” on page E-81 to display the

song editor menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“Extract” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays an “Extract” screen like the one shown

below.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to start

extraction or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

Perform the procedure under “To start a song

editor operation” on page E-81 to display the

song editor menu.

Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to

“Rename” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the “Rename” screen.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the

cursor to the name character position you want

to change, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)

buttons to select the character you want.

• See “Supported Input Characters” (page E-160) for

information about the characters you can input for the

name.

• To input a space, press both of the R-14 (–, +) buttons

at the same time.

After everything is the way you want, press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to rename

the song or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

To extract system track recorded content to

track 04 through 07 or 09 through 16

B04

B05

B06

B07

B09

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

B16

A04

A05

A06

A07

A09

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

A16

System Track

To rename a song

CTK7300IN_e.book 84 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-85

The following operations are supported during track (system

track, Tracks 01 through 16) editing.

• Clearing a single track

• Copying one track to another track (Tracks 01 through 16

only)

• Combining two tracks into a single track (Tracks 01 through

16 only)

Press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to

enter the song sequencer mode.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-4 (EDIT) button to display

the edit menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“TrackEdit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the track editor menu shown below.

Perform the procedure under “To start a track

editor operation” on page E-85 to display the

track editor menu.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This causes the “Clear Track” screen to appear.

Use the dial or R-17 (u, i) buttons to specify

the track you want to clear.

• A black box ( ) above a track number in the level

meter indicates that there is already data recorded in

that track.

• You also can select a track using the dial or R-14 (–, +)

buttons.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to clear or

the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

Editing a Track

To start a track editor operation

To clear a single track

CTK7300IN_e.book 85 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-86

Perform the procedure under “To start a track

editor operation” on page E-85 to display the

track editor menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“Copy” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This causes the “Copy Track” screen to appear. At this

time the thick brackets (%) will be located at the

“Copy” setting.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the

track number you want to copy from.

Press the R-17 (y) button to move the thick

brackets (%) to “To”.

• An asterisk (*) next to a track number indicates that

there is already data recorded in that track.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the

track number you want to copy to.

After everything is the way you want, press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

• If the copy destination track does not contain recorded

data, the copy operation is performed immediately.

• If the copy destination track already contains recorded

data, the confirmation message shown below appears

asking if you want to overwrite the existing data.

Press the R-14 (YES) button to perform the copy

operation and overwrite the existing track or the R-14

(NO) button to cancel.

In the song sequencer mode, use the R-17 (u,

i) buttons to select the lower numbered track

of those you want to combine.

• As an example, we will combine Track 03 and Track 05

into Track 06. Here, select Track 03.

Perform steps 2 and 3 of the procedure under

“To start a track editor operation” on page E-85

to display the track editor menu.

Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to

“Merge” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays a “Merge Track” screen like the one

shown below. At this time the thick brackets (%) will

be located at setting B.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify 05

(Track 05) for B.

• Changing the value of B also causes the C value to

change.

Press an R-17 (i or y) button to move the

thick brackets (%) to C.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify 06

(Track 06) for C.

To copy one track to another track

(Tracks 01 through 16 only)

To combine two tracks into a single track

(Tracks 01 through 16 only)

ABC

A: One of the tracks to be combined (The track you

selected in step 1 is the initial default selection).

B: Other track to be combined.

C: Destination track of combined tracks.

CTK7300IN_e.book 86 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-87

After everything is the way you want, press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

• If the destination track does not contain recorded data,

combination of the tracks starts immediately.

• If the destination track already contains recorded data,

the confirmation message shown below appears asking

if you want to overwrite the existing data.

Press the R-14 (YES) button to perform the process and

overwrite the existing track or the R-14 (NO) button to

cancel.

• Performing the above procedure does not clear the

contents of the two source tracks. If you no longer need the

content of a track, you can clear it using the procedure

under “To clear a single track” (page E-85).

The song sequencer records all Digital Keyboard operations

you perform while playing as “events”, which are the smallest

unit of data that makes up a song. Playing a single note on the

keyboard, for example, stores the following events: note start

measure, beat, and track, note pitch, note length, and note

intensity.

The following operations are supported during event editing.

• Deleting events

• Inserting events

• Copying events within a specific range to a desired location

• Quantizing* note events

• Deleting pitch bender events

• Adjusting note event velocity values

• Adjusting note event gate time values

• Selecting the type of events that appear on the Event Editor

screen (View Select)

• Inserting or deleting beat events

• Directly inputting note events (step input)

*Quantize is an operation that automatically adjusts the

note-on timing of a note event to match a reference note.

Press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to

enter the song sequencer mode.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-4 (EDIT) button to display

the edit menu.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This displays the event editor screen shown below.

• For information about how to use the event editor

screen, see “Event Types and Screen Content” (page

E-88).

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays the event editor menu shown below.

• Next, select the menu item that corresponds to the type

of operation you want to perform. Details about each

operation are provided in the procedures of this section.

Editing Events

To start an event editor operation

CTK7300IN_e.book 87 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-88

The event editor screen displays the individual events that

make up a song as values and characters as shown in the

sample screen below.

The event editor screen shows three events at one time. The

event in the middle line is the selected event. You can change

the value where the solid-line cursor is located. A broken line

under a setting value indicates that the cursor can be moved

to that value.

■Reading Event Data

Here we will use two types of event displays to explain how to

read event data.

• Example 1: Note event

• Example 2: Pitch bender event

The following explains the meaning of each screen position.

Event Types and Screen Content

Event being edited (selected event) (Center of screen)

Events before (previous event) and after

(following event) the current event

Cursor (solid line)

214

Cursor

214

Cursor

Number Description

For all event types, indicates the even location

(timing) in the following format:

measure:beat:tick. A “tick” is a time unit that is

shorter than one beat. Song sequencer data uses

96 ticks per beat (for 2/4 to 8/4) or 48 ticks per

beat (for 2/8 to 16/8).

For almost all events, this position shows an

abbreviation indicating the event type. “Bend” in

display example (2) stands for “pitch bender

event”. Note events (display example (1)) and

chord events are different in that this position

shows the event parameter (note name for a note

event, root for a chord event) setting value.

For information about what is displayed at this

position and the corresponding event type, see

the “Event Data List” (page E-89).

This position shows parameter setting values that

corresponds to the event type. When an event

has multiple parameters, use the R-17 (u, i)

buttons to move the cursor, which will scroll the

display between the parameters. The name of the

parameter at the current cursor position will be

displayed in position 4.

This position indicates where the cursor is

currently located as “MEAS.” (measure), “BEAT”

(beat), or “TICK” (tick).

CTK7300IN_e.book 88 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-89

■Event Data List

The following table shows the event types that correspond to the abbreviations that appear on the display, as well as the

parameters of each event type and setting ranges.

•“

2 display” and “4 display” in the table headings correspond to the 2, 4 screen positions under “Reading Event Data” (page

E-88).

•“

2 display during insert” in the table headings indicates the event type name enclosed in thick brackets (%) when step 3 of

insert event procedure under “To insert an event” (page E-94).

System Track and Track 01 to 16 Common Events

Track 01 to 16 Events

Event Type 2 display during

insert 4 display Parameter Name Setting Range

2 display Event Name

TOP (song start point) – – – (Not editable)

*1Note [Note]

NOTE Note name C- - C0 - G9*2

GATE Gate time 00:00 - 99:95

VEL Velocity 001 - 127

Bend Pitch Bender [Bend]VALU Pitch Bender –8192 - 0000 - +8191

Mod Modulation*3[Modulat]VALU Modulation 000 - 127

ModB Modulation Button [ModBttn]VALU Button On/Off on, oFF

RotB Rotary Slow/Fast Button [RotBttn]VALU Button On/Off on, oFF

END (song end point) – – – (Not editable)

*1 A note event is not displayed as the event name at position 2, but rather as the note name (C4, etc.).

*2 “C-” on the display indicates C-1 (one octave below C0).

*3 This event can be added only with the operation under “To insert an event” (page E-94). It applies vibrato.

Event Type 2 display during

insert 4 display Parameter Name Setting Range

2 display Event Name

TONE Part Tone [Tone]VALU Tone Number A:001 - L:100

Sus Part Sustain Pedal [Sustain]VALU Part Sustain Pedal 000 - 127

Sost Part Sostenuto Pedal [Sostenu]VALU Part Sostenuto Pedal 000 - 127

Soft Part Soft Pedal [Soft]VALU Part Soft Pedal 000 - 127

Vol Part Volume [Volume]VALU Part Volume 000 - 127

Pan Part Pan [Pan]VALU Part Pan –64 - 00 - +63

CTun Part Coarse Tune [CrsTune]VALU Part Coarse Tune –24 - 00 - +24

FTun Part Fine Tune [FinTune]VALU Part Fine Tune –99 - 00 - +99

BndR Part Bend Range [BendRng]VALU Part Bend Range 00 - 24

RSnd Part Reverb Send [RevSend]VALU Part Reverb Send 000 - 127

CSnd Part Chorus Send [ChoSend]VALU Part Chorus Send 000 - 127

SclE Part Scale Enable [ScaleEn]VALU Part Scale Enable on, oFF

DspL Part DSP Line [DspLine]VALU Part DSP Line on, oFF

Exp Part Expression*4[Express]VALU Part Expression 000 - 127

OrgB Drawbar Organ Drawbar [OrgnBar]Ft. Feet 16, 5 1/3, 8, 4, 2 2/3, 2,

13/5, 1 1/3, 1

VALU Level 0 - 8

OrgP Drawbar Organ

Percussion [OrgnPrc]TYP Type 2nd, 3rd

VALU On/Off on, oFF

*4 This event can be added only with the operation under “To insert an event” (page E-94). It changes the volume.

CTK7300IN_e.book 89 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-90

System Track Events

Event Type 2 display during

insert 4 display Parameter Name Setting Range

2 display Event Name

TnU1 UPPER 1 Tone [Tone_U1]VALU Tone Number A:001 - L:100

TnU2 UPPER 2 Tone [Tone_U2]VALU Tone Number A:001 - L:100

TnLo LOWER Tone [Tone_Lo]VALU Tone Number A:001 - L:100

TnHm Auto Harmonize Tone [Tone_Hm]VALU Tone Number A:001 - L:100

*1Chord [Chord]

ROOT Root C - B

TYPE Chord type *2

CVEL Chord velocity 000 - 127

RHY Rhythm [Rhythm]VALU Rhythm Number A:001 - F:100

Rctl Rhythm Controller [RhyCtrl]VALU Rhythm controller *3

APrt Accompaniment Part

On/Off [AcmpPrt]PART Part PREC, DRUM, BASS,

CHD1 - CHD5

VALU On/Off on, oFF

Layr Layer On/Off [Layer]VALU Layer On/Off on, oFF

Shft Octave Shift [OctShft]PART Part HARM, UPP1, UPP2,

LOWR

VALU Octave Shift –2 - 0 - +2

Splt Split On/Off [Split]VALU Split On/Off on, oFF

TMPO Tempo [Tempo]VALU Tempo 30 - 255

SplP Split Point [SplitPt]VALU Split Point C- - C0 - G9*4

HmAp Auto Harmonize/

Arpeggiator [HarmArp]VALU Auto Harmonize/

Arpeggiator oFF, 001 - 162

ApHd Arpeggiator Hold [ArpHold]VALU Arpeggiator Hold on, oFF

ApSp Arpeggiator Speed [ArpSpd]VALU Arpeggiator Speed 1, 2, 2S, 3, 4, 4S, 6, 8

ApPt Arpeggiator Part [ArpPart]VALU Arpeggiator Part U12, U1, U2, Low

Revb Reverb [Reverb]VALU Reverb oFF, 01 - 10

Chrs Chorus [Chorus]VALU Chorus 1 - 5

DSP DSP [DSP]VALU DSP ton, 001 - 200

Scal Scale [Scale]NOTE Key C - B

Cent Cent –99 - 00 - +99

Sus Part Sustain Pedal [Sustain]PART Part HARM, UPP1, UPP2,

LOWR

VALU Part Sustain Pedal 000 - 127

Sost Part Sostenuto Pedal [Sostenu]PART Part HARM, UPP1, UPP2,

LOWR

VALU Part Sostenuto Pedal 000 - 127

Soft Part Soft Pedal [Soft]PART Part HARM, UPP1, UPP2,

LOWR

VALU Part Soft Pedal 000 - 127

Vol Part Volume [Volume]PART Part HARM, UPP1, UPP2,

LOWR

VALU Part Volume 000 - 127

Pan Part Pan [Pan]PART Part HARM, UPP1, UPP2,

LOWR

VALU Part Pan –64 - 00 - +63

CTun Part Coarse Tune [CrsTune]PART Part HARM, UPP1, UPP2,

LOWR

VALU Part Coarse Tune –24 - 00 - +24

CTK7300IN_e.book 90 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-91

Perform steps 1 to 3 of the procedure under “To start an event editor operation” on page E-87 to display

the event editor screen.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button, use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the track you

want to edit.

FTun Part Fine Tune [FinTune]PART Part HARM, UPP1, UPP2,

LOWR

VALU Part Fine Tune –99 - 00 - +99

BndR Part Bend Range [BendRng]PART Part HARM, UPP1, UPP2,

LOWR

VALU Part Bend Range 00 - 24

RSnd Part Reverb Send [RevSend]PART Part HARM, UPP1, UPP2,

LOWR

VALU Part Reverb Send 000 - 127

CSnd Part Chorus Send [ChoSend]PART Part HARM, UPP1, UPP2,

LOWR

VALU Part Chorus Send 000 - 127

DspL Part DSP Line [DspLine]PART Part HARM, UPP1, UPP2,

LOWR

VALU Part DSP Line on, oFF

AVol Accomp Volume*5[AcmpVol]VALU Accomp volume 000 - 127

AScl Accomp Scale*6[AcmpScl]VALU Accomp Scale on, oFF

OrgB Drawbar Organ Drawbar [OrgnBar]

PART Part HARM, UPP1, UPP2,

LOWR

Ft. Feet 16, 5 1/3, 8, 4, 2 2/3, 2,

13/5, 1 1/3, 1

VALU Level 0 - 8

OrgP Drawbar Organ

Percussion [OrgnPrc]

PART Part HARM, UPP1, UPP2,

LOWR

TYP Type 2nd, 3rd

VALU On/Off on, oFF

*1 A chord event is not displayed as the event name at position 2, but rather as the chord root (C, etc.)

*2 See “Fingering Guide” on (page E-160).

*3 Intro: intro pattern, norml: normal pattern, Vari: variation pattern, nFlOn: normal fill-in on, nFloF: normal fill-in off,

vFlOn: variation fill-in on, vFloF: variation fill-in off, Endin: ending pattern.

*4 “C-” on the display indicates C-1 (one octave below C0).

*5 This setting corresponds to the function menu “AccompVol.” item (page E-133).

*6 For details, see “Specifying whether the Current Scale Settings Should be Applied to Auto Accompaniment (Accomp Scale)”

(page E-22).

To select a track for editing

Event Type 2 display during

insert 4 display Parameter Name Setting Range

2 display Event Name

CTK7300IN_e.book 91 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-92

Perform steps 1 to 3 of the procedure under “To

start an event editor operation” on page E-87 to

display the event editor screen.

Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button.

• This starts playback of the song being edited from the

first measure where the cursor is currently located.

• Playback stops automatically when it reaches the end

of a song. To stop playback part way through, press the

L-16 (START/STOP) button.

Perform the procedure under “To start an event

editor operation” on page E-87.

Use R-17 (i) button to display page three of

the event editor menu, with the 0 located at

“ViewSelect”.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This displays the “View Select” screen.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0

between the setting items, and the dial or R-14

(–, +) buttons to toggle the currently selected

setting between “on” (shown) and “oFF”

(hidden).

• The table below shows the event that corresponds to

each setting item.

• For information about each event, see “Event Types

and Screen Content” (page E-88).

Press the R-15 (EXIT) button to apply the

settings and exit the “View Select” screen.

Display the event editor screen of the track that

includes the event you want to edit.

• See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91).

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the

cursor to the event you want to edit.

• You can use the L-14 (dFF) and L-13 (sREW)

buttons to move the cursor by measure-by-measure.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the

cursor, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)

buttons to change the value at the cursor

position.

• The cursor flashes during a value change operation.

• During note event recording, you can change the pitch

of a note by pressing a keyboard key. If the cursor is

located at the “VEL” position, the velocity value will

change at the same time as the note pitch.

To apply the changed value, press the R-16

(ENTER) button.

• This causes the cursor to stop flashing.

Display the event editor screen of the track that

includes the events you want to delete.

• See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91).

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the

cursor to the event you want to delete.

Press the C-10 (DELETE) button.

• The event at the current cursor position will be deleted

as soon as you press the C-10 (DELETE) button.

To play back a song from the event editor

screen (Quick Play)

To select the types of events that appear on

the Event Editor screen (View Select)

Setting Item Corresponding Event

Note Note event

PitchBend Pitch Bend event

Pedal Sustain, soft, sostenuto events

Rhythm Rhythm event

Chord Chord event

Tempo Tempo event

Tone Tone event

Mixer Mixer event (excluding Tone event)

Others All other events besides those above.

To edit an existing event

To delete an individual event

CTK7300IN_e.book 92 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-93

Display the event editor screen of the track that

includes the events you want to delete.

• See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91).

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button to display

the event editor menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“Delete” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the “Delete” screen.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting in the thick brackets (%) to “All”, and

then press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to delete

or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

Display the event editor screen of the track that

includes the events you want to delete.

• See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91).

If required, you can perform a song playback

operation at this time to check the range you

want to select for deletion.

• See “To play back a song from the event editor screen

(Quick Play)” (page E-92).

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button to display

the event editor menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“Delete” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the “Delete” screen.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting in the thick brackets (%) to “Locator”.

• This displays a range specification screen like the one

shown below.

• If you have already specified a range using the locator

screen (page E-80), that range will be displayed on the

range specification screen.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the

cursor, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)

buttons to change the value at the cursor

position.

• The event located at the timing specified by the range

end point will not be deleted.

After everything is the way you want, press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to delete

or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

To delete all events in a track

To delete all events in a specific range of a

track

Range start point Range end point

CTK7300IN_e.book 93 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-94

Display the event editor screen of the track

where you want to insert the event.

• See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91).

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the

cursor to the position where you want to insert

an event.

• The new event will be inserted at the same timing as

the event where the cursor is located. You can fine tune

the timing after inserting the new event.

Press the C-11 (INSERT) button.

• This inserts the event at the specified location and

displays a screen like the one shown below.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select an

event type.

• For information about events that can be specified, see

“Event Types and Screen Content” (page E-88).

• When a note event is specified as the event type,

specify the note type (note length) using the buttons

shown in the table below. You specify the pitch of the

note in step 6 of this procedure.

*For dotted notes and triplets, first select the note and then

add the dot or triplet. To specify a dotted quarter note, for

example, press the R-3 (2) button and then the R-4 ( • )

button.

After everything is the way you want, press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This inserts the specified event.

Adjust the settings of the event as desired.

•Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the cursor, and

then use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

value at the cursor position. The cursor flashes during a

value change operation.

• For information about data types and setting value

ranges for events that can be edited, see “Event Types

and Screen Content” (page E-88).

To apply the event data, press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This causes the cursor to stop flashing.

• You also can perform the operation in step 3 by moving the

0 to “Insert” on the event editor menu and then pressing

the R-16 (ENTER) button.

Display the event editor screen of the track that

contains the events you want to copy.

• See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91).

If required, you can perform a song playback

operation to check the range you want to select

for copying and the copy location.

• See “To play back a song from the event editor screen

(Quick Play)” (page E-92).

To insert an event

To specify this type of

note: Press this button:

Whole R-1 (5)

Half R-2 (1)

Quarter R-3 (2)

Eighth R-7 (6)

Sixteenth R-8 (7)

Thirty-second R-9 (8)

Dotted*R-4 ( • )

Triplet*R-10 (,)

Event type name

Note type (for note event only)

To copy the events within a specific range to

a desired location

018:01:00 020:01:00 024:01:00

1 2

CTK7300IN_e.book 94 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-95

Press the C-12 (COPY) button.

• This displays the “Copy” screen.

• If you have already specified a range using the locator

screen (page E-80), that range will be displayed on the

range specification screen.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the

cursor, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)

buttons to change the value at the cursor

position.

After everything is the way you want, press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to copy or

the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

• Pressing the R-14 (YES) button executes the copy

operation. The message “Complete” appears and the

display returns to the “Copy” screen after the copy is

complete.

• At this time, the “2 Copy destination point” value on

the locator screen moves forward by the length

specified by “1 Copy source range”.

If you want to continue by copying the same copy

source range to another location, repeat steps 5 and 6

again.

To return to the event editor screen, press the

R-15 (EXIT) button.

Display the event editor screen of the track that

includes the event you want to quantize.

• See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91).

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the

cursor to the event you want to quantize.

Press the C-13 (QUANTIZE) button.

• This displays the “Quantize” screen.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting in the thick brackets (%) to “Cursor”.

Specify the note you want to use as the

quantize reference note.

*For a triplet, first select the note and then add the triplet. To

specify a triplet made up of quarter notes, for example,

press the R-3 (2) button and then the R-10 (,) button.

After everything is the way you want, press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This performs quantization and returns to the event

editor screen.

1 Copy source range (start point - end point)

2 Copy destination point

018:01:00 020:01:00 024:01:00 026:01:00

1 2

To quantize an individual note event

To specify this type of

note: Press this button:

Quarter R-3 (2)

Eighth R-7 (6)

Sixteenth R-8 (7)

Thirty-second R-9 (8)

Triplet*R-10 (,)

CTK7300IN_e.book 95 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-96

Display the event editor screen of the track you

want to quantize.

• See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91).

Press the C-13 (QUANTIZE) button.

• This displays the “Quantize” screen.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting in the thick brackets (%) to “All”.

Perform step 5 under “To quantize an individual

note event” (page E-95).

Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button when you

want to play back with quantization applied.

• Note that the actual data still has not been changed yet.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to

quantize or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

Display the event editor screen of the track that

includes the events you want to quantize.

• See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91).

If required, you can perform a song playback

operation at this time to check the range you

want to select for quanitization.

• See “To play back a song from the event editor screen

(Quick Play)” (page E-92).

Press the C-13 (QUANTIZE) button.

• This displays the “Quantize” screen.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting in the thick brackets (%) to “Locator”.

• This displays a range specification screen like the one

shown below.

• If you have already specified a range using the locator

screen (page E-80), that range will be displayed on the

range specification screen.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the

cursor, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)

buttons to change the value at the cursor

position.

Perform step 5 under “To quantize an individual

note event” (page E-95).

Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button when you

want to play back with quantization applied.

• Note that the actual data still has not been changed yet.

After everything is the way you want, press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to

quantize or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

To quantize all note events in a track

To quantize all note events within specific

range of a track

Range start point Range end point

CTK7300IN_e.book 96 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-97

You can use the procedures in this section to delete all pitch

bender events from a track or from a specific range in a track.

• To delete individual pitch bender events, perform the

operation under “To delete an individual event” (page

E-92).

• After deleting the pitch bender events in one track from

Track 01 through Track 16, you can overdub new pitch

bender (PITCH BEND wheel (S-1)) operations for that

track. To do so, use the procedure under “To record to

Tracks 01 through 16” (page E-73), and select “OVDB”

(Overdub) for the “RecType” setting in step 6-(5).

• Since “OVDB” cannot be selected for “RecType” when

recording to the system track, you will not be able to

overdub pitch bender operations after deleting pitch bender

events from the system track. You can use the procedure

under “To insert an event” (page E-94) to insert pitch

bender events.

■To delete all pitch bender events in a track

Display the event editor screen of the track

whose pitch bender events you want to delete.

• See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91).

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button to display

the event editor menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“DeleteBender” and then press the R-16

(ENTER) button.

• This causes “Delete Bender” screen to appear.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting in the thick brackets (%) to “ALL”, and

then press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to delete

or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

■To delete all pitch bender events within a specific

range of a track

Display the event editor screen of the track

whose pitch bender events you want to delete.

• See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91).

If required, you can perform a song playback

operation at this time to check the range you

want to select for deletion.

• See “To play back a song from the event editor screen

(Quick Play)” (page E-92).

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button to display

the event editor menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“DeleteBender” and then press the R-16

(ENTER) button.

• This causes “Delete Bender” screen to appear.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting in the thick brackets (%) to “Locator”.

• This displays a range specification screen like the one

shown below.

• If you have already specified a range using the locator

screen (page E-80), that range will be displayed on the

range specification screen.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the

cursor, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)

buttons to change the value at the cursor

position.

After everything is the way you want, press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to delete

or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

Deleting Pitch Bender Events

Range start point Range end point

CTK7300IN_e.book 97 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-98

Display the event editor screen of the track you

want to edit.

• See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91).

Depending on the type of adjustment you want

make, perform one of the operations below.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button to display

the event editor menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“VelocityMod.” and then press the R-16

(ENTER) button.

• This displays the “Velocity Modify” screen.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

mode indicated in the thick brackets (%).

• While the “Locator” mode is selected, use the R-17 (u,

i) buttons, the dial, or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to

specify the range whose note event velocity value you

want to adjust.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This will display the setting screen like the one shown

below.

• The following explains the meanings and setting ranges

of the on-screen items. The settings marked with an

asterisk (*) in the “Setting Range” column are initial

defaults.

To change the setting to the desired value,

press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to execute

the adjustment or the R-14 (NO) button to

cancel.

To adjust the velocity value of a note event

To adjust this: Do this:

Individual note event On the event editor screen,

move the cursor to the note

event you want to adjust and

then advance to step 3.

All note events in a track Advance to step 3.

Note events within a

specific range in a track

Advance to step 3.

To adjust this: Select this mode:

Individual note event Cursor

All note events in a track All

Note events within a specific range

in a track

Locator

Item name Description Setting Range

Fix

(Fixed value)

Specifies a fixed value as the

velocity value.

Select “oFF” for this setting to

adjust based on the current

velocity value of each note

event.

oFF

, 001 to 127

Rate

(Velocity Rate)

These settings are enabled

only when the “oFF” is

selected for the “Fix” setting.

They change the velocity

value of each note event

according to the mathematical

expression (decimal parts cut

off) shown below. 1 is used

when the value produced by

the expression is less than 1,

and 127 is used when it is

greater than 127.

(Current velocity) X (Rate

setting) + (Offset setting)

000% to 100%

200%

Offset

(Velocity Offset)

–126 to 000

+126

CTK7300IN_e.book 98 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-99

Perform steps 1 through 5 under “To adjust the

velocity value of a note event” (page E-98). In

step 4, select “GatetimeMod.” instead of

“VelocityMod.”.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This will display the setting screen like the one shown

below.

• The following explains the meanings and setting ranges

of the on-screen items. The settings marked with an

asterisk (*) in the “Setting Range” column are initial

defaults.

To change the setting to the desired value,

press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to execute

the adjustment or the R-14 (NO) button to

cancel.

Perform the procedure under “To start an event

editor operation” (page E-87) to display the

event editor menu.

Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to

“Beat” and then press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This displays the “Beat” screen.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the

cursor to the beat event you want to delete.

Press the C-10 (DELETE) button.

• The event at the current cursor position will be deleted

as soon as you press the C-10 (DELETE) button.

To adjust the gate time value of a note event

Item name Description Setting Range

Fix

(Fixed value)

Specifies a fixed value as the

time gate value. 99:95 stands

for quarter note 99 beats, 95

ticks.

Select “oFF” for this setting to

adjust based on the current

gate time value of each note

event.

oFF

00:00 to 99:95

Rate

(Gate Time

Rate)

These settings are enabled

only when the “oFF” is

selected for the “Fix” setting.

They change the gate time

value of each note event

according to the mathematical

expression (decimal parts cut

off) shown below. 00:00 is

used when the value

produced by the expression is

less than 00:00, and 99:95 is

used when it is greater than

99:95.

(Current gate time) X (Rate

setting) + (Offset setting)

000% to 100%

200%

Offset

(Gate Time

Offset)

–9:95 to 0:00

+9:95

To delete a beat event

CTK7300IN_e.book 99 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-100

Perform steps 1 and 2 under “To delete a beat

event” (page E-99).

Move the cursor to the beat event that comes

immediately before the location where you want

to insert a new beat event.

Press the C-11 (INSERT) button.

• This will insert a new beat event into the next measure

after the cursor position you selected in step 2, which

does not contain a beat event. If, for example, there are

beat events already in measures 16 and 17, selecting

the beat event in measure 16 with the cursor and

pressing the C-11 (INSERT) button will insert a new

beat event into measure 18.

Change the beat event measure and beat as

required.

• Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the cursor, and

then use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

value at the cursor position. The cursor flashes during a

value change operation. Pressing the R-16 (ENTER)

button applies the setting and causes the cursor to stop

flashing.

To return to the event editor screen, press the

R-15 (EXIT) button.

Step input is an event editor function. You can use step input

to specify the length and pitch of each individual note (note

event). In the system track, you also can perform step input of

Auto Accompaniment chords (chord events) as well.

• Performing step input into a track that already contains

recorded data will not delete the existing data. This means

you can use step input to add to existing recorded data.

Display the event editor screen of the track

where you want to perform step input.

• See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91).

Press the C-14 (STEP) button.

• This will display a step screen like the one shown

below. The cursor is always flashing during step input.

Configure step input settings.

Use the L-14 (dFF) and L-13 (sREW)

buttons to move the cursor to the location from

which you want to perform step input.

• The cursor will move in one-measure steps.

To insert a beat event

Directly Inputting Note Events

(Step Input)

To perform step input

(1) While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button,

press the C-17 (MENU) button.

This displays the input menu shown below.

(2) Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to the

setting item you want to change.

(3) Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting value.

For information about the meanings and setting ranges

of the on-screen items, see “Input Menu Setting Items”

(page E-101).

(4) Press the R-15 (EXIT) button to exit the menu.

Cursor (flashing)

CTK7300IN_e.book 100 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Song Sequencer

E-101

Use buttons R-1 (5) to R-4 ( • ) and buttons R-7 (6) to R-10 (,) to specify the length of the note you want

to input.

• For information about how to specify note lengths, see step 4 under “To insert an event” (page E-94).

• You can perform the following operations during step input to insert ties and rests.

Press the keyboard key that corresponds to the note you want to input.

• The note is input as soon as you press the keyboard key, and the cursor will move by the length you specified in step 5 to the

next measure:beat:tick. From there you can input the next note, if you want.

Repeat steps 5 and 6 to input the notes you want.

• If you want to input a series of notes of the same length, skip step 5 and perform step 6 only.

After inputting all of the notes you want, press the R-15 (EXIT) or R-17 (t, y) button.

• This returns to the event editor screen.

Pressing the C-17 (MENU) button while holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button during step input will display the input menu.

The following explains the meanings and setting ranges of the input menu items. The settings marked with an asterisk (*) in the

“Setting Range” column are initial defaults.

To do this: Perform this operation:

Tie the note at the

current cursor position

with the note event

immediately before it

1. At the current cursor position, specify the length of the note you want to tie with the immediately

preceding note event.

2. Press the R-11 (.) button.

• This adds the length of the note you specified in step 1 to the length of the note immediately

preceding it. At this time, the cursor will move forward by the timing of the added amount.

Insert a rest before the

current cursor position

1. At the current cursor position, specify a note that is the same length as the rest you want to insert.

2. Press the R-5 (REST) button.

• The cursor will move forward by the length of the note you specified in step 1.

Input Menu Setting Items

Item name Description Setting Range

GateRate

(Gate Rate)

Specifies the gate rate as a percentage of the actually input gate length for the

length (gate length) of the note event that was specified using buttons R-1 (5)

through R-4 ( • ) and R-7 (6) through R-10 (,). Specifying a GateRate of

080% and inputting a quarter note (96 ticks), for example, will result in a GATE

setting of 00:76 (96 X0.8 = 76.8, cut off to 76).

001% to 080%* to 100%

Velocity

(Velocity)

Specifies the velocity value of an input note event or chord event. Specifying

“KeyOn” inputs a velocity value in accordance with applied key pressure.

KeyOn, 001 to 100* to 127

SysTrack

(System Track)

Selects either note event input or chord event input when inputting to the

system track.

note*, Chord

226

APreceding note event

BCurrent cursor position

CCursor position after process

BCurrent cursor position

CCursor position after process

CTK7300IN_e.book 101 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-102

Using the Pattern Sequencer

You can use the pattern sequencer to create accompaniment

patterns that sound while using the Digital Keyboard’s Auto

Accompaniment function and store them as user rhythms.

Each of the Digital Keyboard’s rhythms provides six different

accompaniment patterns named INTRO, NORMAL, NORMAL

FILL-IN, VARIATION, VARIATION FILL-IN, and ENDING.

Each accompaniment pattern can be made up of eight

instrument parts (drums, percussion, bass, and chord 1

through chord 5).

The overall configuration of a single rhythm is as shown

below.

The pattern sequencer is a function that allows editing and

creation of the various accompaniment patterns that make up

a single rhythm, part-by-part. You can record each part of all

of the accompaniment patterns from scratch to create a

completely original new rhythm. You also can partially edit an

existing rhythm (by, for example, editing only one of the parts

of an accompaniment pattern) or simply modify its mixer

settings if you want.

You can use the pattern sequencer to record keyboard play

(note data), PITCH BEND wheel (S-1) operations, and S-2

(MODULATION) button operations.

As a general rule, pattern sequencer editing operations are

performed on an instrument part basis. The pattern sequencer

maintains special memory areas called “rec areas” for each

instrument part during rhythm editing. These areas are used

when recording keyboard notes.

When editing with the pattern sequencer, there may be

previously existing rhythm data remaining for some of the

instrument parts, which will make it impossible to use the rec

areas. The status of an instrument part that still contains

previously existing rhythm data is “Fix Data”.

You can use the pattern sequencer screen to check whether

the currently selected instrument part is in the rec area or if it

is “Fix Data”.

You can display the pattern sequencer screen by pressing the

C-5 (PATTERN SEQUENCER) button. This will display the

pattern sequencer editing screen for the currently selected

rhythm (preset rhythm or previously stored user rhythm). The

initial screen shows the drum part of the NORMAL

accompaniment pattern of the rhythm being edited. Note “Fix

Data” in the lower left corner. This is the current status of the

currently displayed instrument part.

C-10C-10L-12L-12 C-17C-17

L-15L-15

L-16L-16L-14L-14

L-13L-13

R-15R-15

R-17R-17

R-13R-13

R-16R-16

C-7C-7

R-14R-14

C-5C-5

L-8L-8 C-3C-3

About the Pattern Sequencer

Rhythms, Accompaniment Patterns, and

Instrument Parts

Rhythm

INTRO NORMAL NORMAL FILL-IN

Drums Drums Drums

Percussion Percussion Percussion

Bass Bass Bass

Chord 1 to Chord 5 Chord 1 to Chord 5 Chord 1 to Chord 5

VARIATION VARIATION FILL-IN ENDING

Drums Drums Drums

Percussion Percussion Percussion

Bass Bass Bass

Chord 1 to Chord 5 Chord 1 to Chord 5 Chord 1 to Chord 5

Recordable Data

Instrument Part Editing and Rec Areas

CTK7300IN_e.book 102 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-103

The following describes each of the different instrument part

statuses that appear in the lower left corner of the screen.

Rhythm areas numbered F:001 through F:100 are for storage

of user rhythms. You can have up to 100 user rhythms stored

in memory at one time. You can recall a stored user rhythm by

pressing the L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS) button. See “Playing

an Auto Accompaniment” (page E-24) for more information.

This section explains the various methods you can use to

create user rhythms.

■Editing One or More Parts of an Existing Rhythm

With this procedure, you edit an existing preset rhythm or

previously stored user rhythm to create a new rhythm.

With this method, you can select and edit (or record anew)

specific parts of an existing accompaniment pattern and store

the result.

The following is the general flow for this method.

*You cannot edit the INTRO or ENDING of an

accompaniment pattern of an existing rhythm.

For full details about this procedure, see “To rehearse before

editing an existing rhythm” (page E-104) and “To edit an

existing rhythm” (page E-107).

When this is

displayed: It means this:

Fix Data

(Fixed Data)

Instrument part data from a preset

rhythm or user rhythm. The only

settings that can be edited for an

instrument part with this status are

mixer settings. Real-time recording of

keyboard notes and event editing are

not allowed.

Recorded Data

(Recorded Data)

Instrument part is being edited using a

rec area, and recorded data is

contained in the rec area. Mixer

settings, real-time recording of

keyboard notes, and event editing are

allowed for an instrument part with this

status.

Empty

(No data)

Instrument part is being edited using a

rec area, but there is no recorded data

in the rec area (rec area empty). Mixer

settings, real-time recording of

keyboard notes, and event editing are

allowed for an instrument part with this

status.

User Rhythm Numbers

Creating a User Rhythm

Check the content of the rhythm you will edit and

determine how (what part of what accompaniment

pattern*) you will edit it.

Use the rec menu to configure settings related to

accompaniment pattern recording.

Display the instrument part for the accompaniment

pattern you want to edit and then configure the desired

mixer settings and record keyboard notes.

After editing is complete, store the rhythm as a user

rhythm.

CTK7300IN_e.book 103 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-104

■Replacing the Accompaniment Patterns of an

Existing Rhythm with New Recordings

With this procedure, you re-record one or more of the

accompaniment patterns of an existing preset rhythm or

previously stored user rhythm to create a new rhythm.

In this case, you clear all of the rec areas included in an

accompaniment pattern and then create new recordings of

each part of the accompaniment pattern. Use this method, for

example, when you want to create only a new INTRO

accompaniment pattern for an existing rhythm.

The following is the general flow for this method.

For full details about this procedure, see “To create a new

accompaniment pattern” (page E-109).

■Newly Recording All Accompaniment Patterns of

a Rhythm

With this procedure, you create a new rhythm from scratch,

without using an existing rhythm.

The following is the general flow for this method.

For full details about this procedure, see “To create a new

rhythm from scratch” (page E-111).

Select the rhythm you want to edit in order to

create your user rhythm.

Press the C-5 (PATTERN SEQUENCER) button.

• This displays the pattern sequencer screen.

Clear all of the rec areas of the accompaniment pattern

you want to record anew.

Use the rec menu to configure settings related to

accompaniment pattern recording.

On the edit menu, configure accompaniment pattern

number of measure and beat settings.

Sequentially record each of the parts.

After editing is complete, store the entire rhythm as a

user rhythm.

Clear all of the rec areas included in the currently

selected rhythm.

Use the rec menu to configure settings related to

accompaniment pattern recording.

On the edit menu, configure accompaniment pattern

number of measure and beat settings.

Sequentially record each of the parts of each

accompaniment pattern.

After editing is complete, store the rhythm as a user

rhythm.

To rehearse before editing an existing

rhythm

Currently selected instrument part

Currently selected instrument part status

See “Instrument Part Editing and Rec Areas” (page E-102).

Currently selected accompaniment pattern

CTK7300IN_e.book 104 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-105

Use buttons L-12 (INTRO) through L-15

(SYNCHRO/ENDING) to select the

accompaniment pattern you want to play. If you

want to play the INTRO accompaniment pattern,

for example, press the L-12 (INTRO) button.

• Each press of the L-13 (NORMAL/FILL-IN) button

toggles between NORMAL and NORMAL FILL-IN, and

each press of the L-14 (VARIATION/FILL-IN) button

toggles between VARIATION and VARIATION FILL-IN.

• The indicator for the currently selected accompaniment

pattern will flash on the display.

Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button.

• The specified accompaniment pattern plays back in a

loop. To sound bass and chord notes, play a chord on

the chord keyboard.

• Each press of the L-16 (START/STOP) button during

the following operation starts or stops playback.

If you want to hear the notes of a particular

instrument part played alone, perform the

following steps.

Repeat steps 3 through 5 as required to

determine which accompaniment patterns you

want to edit and which parts you want to

re-record.

• If you want to proceed directly into the editing operation

from this point, perform the procedure under “To edit an

existing rhythm” (page E-107). If you do, you can either

allow the accompaniment pattern to continue to play, or

you can stop playback by pressing the L-16 (START/

STOP) button.

To exit this procedure without going directly

into the editing operation, press the C-5

(PATTERN SEQUENCER) button.

• If the accompaniment pattern is playing when you press

the C-5 (PATTERN SEQUENCER) button, playback

will stop, the display will exit the pattern sequencer

screen, and the screen that was displayed in step 1 of

this procedure will appear.

Selecting this accompaniment

pattern:

Causes this indicator

to flash:

INTRO E

NORMAL F

NORMAL FILL-IN F G

VARIATION H

VARIATION FILL-IN G H

ENDING J

(1) Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the

instrument part you want to hear played alone.

• The name of the instrument part you select will

appear on the display.

Selecting this

instrument part:

Causes this name to

appear on the display:

Percussion PERC

Drums DRUM

Bass BASS

Chord 1 to Chord 5 CHORD1 to CHORD5

(2) Press the C-7 (MIXER) button and then press the

R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to “Part”.

(3) Press the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time.

• This changes the “Part” setting to “Sol”, which

indicates that the selected instrument part will be

sounded alone (solo).

• To return all parts to their original (non-solo) status,

press the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time or

press either of the R-17 (u, i) buttons.

CTK7300IN_e.book 105 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-106

While the pattern sequencer screen is

displayed, press the C-3 (RECORD) button.

• The button will start to flash and the Digital Keyboard

will enter record standby.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays a rec menu screen like the one shown

below.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to select one of

the items described in the table below and then

use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting.

• The settings marked with an asterisk (*) in the “Setting

Range” column are initial defaults.

Press the R-15 (EXIT) button to exit the rec

menu.

• This returns to the pattern sequencer screen.

Press the C-3 (RECORD) button.

• This exits record standby, which will cause the button to

change from lit to unlit.

To configure pattern rec settings (Rec Menu)

Display:

Item name Description Setting

Range

Quantize:

Quantize

Specify either recording of notes in

the timing they are played on the

keyboard (oFF) or automatic

alignment of notes with a base

note (setting other than oFF).

Selecting a value specifies the

length of each note. “4” specifies

quarter notes, while a “T” setting

specifies triplets.

oFF*, 4, 8,

8T, 16, 16T

Precount:

Pre-count

Specifies whether a precount

should sound before recording

starts after the L-16 (START/

STOP) button is pressed in record

standby. Selecting “1” sounds a

one-measure precount, while “2”

sounds a two-measure precount.

Selecting “oFF” turns off the

precount, so recording starts as

soon as the L-16 (START/STOP)

button or a keyboard key is

pressed.

oFF, 1*, 2

PlayChord:

Playback

Chords

Starting recording of an

accompaniment pattern starts

repeat playback of all the parts of

the pattern, except for the part

being recorded. During such

repeat playback, you can use this

setting to specify the chord type to

be used for playback by bass and

chord parts. Available settings are

“C” (C major), “C7” (C 7th), and

“Cm” (C minor). Selecting “oFF”

turns off bass and chord part

notes.

oFF, C*,

C7, Cm

Metronome:

Metronome

Specifies whether the metronome

should sound (on) or not sound

(oFF) during recording.

oFF*, on

Display:

Item name Description Setting

Range

CTK7300IN_e.book 106 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-107

Perform steps 1 through 6 under “To rehearse

before editing an existing rhythm” (page E-104).

Perform the procedure under “To configure

pattern rec settings (Rec Menu)” (page E-106).

• This step is not necessary if you want to perform

operations using initial default settings or if you want to

use previous settings without changing them.

Press the L-13 (NORMAL/FILL-IN) or L-14

(VARIATION/FILL-IN) button to select the

accompaniment pattern you want to edit.

• You cannot edit the INTRO or ENDING

accompaniment pattern of an existing rhythm. If you

want to create a new accompaniment pattern (INTRO,

ENDING, etc.) from this point, see “To create a new

accompaniment pattern” (page E-109) or “To create a

new rhythm from scratch” (page E-111).

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the

instrument part you want to edit.

Configure mixer settings for the selected

instrument part. You can skip this step if you do

not want to configure mixer settings.

• Here you can press the L-16 (START/STOP) button to

start playback of the accompaniment pattern and

configure mixer settings as you monitor the effects of

the settings on the notes being played.

To edit an existing rhythm

Currently selected instrument part

Currently selected instrument part status

See “Instrument Part Editing and Rec Areas” (page E-102).

Currently selected accompaniment pattern

(1) Press the C-7 (MIXER) button to display the mixer

screen.

(2) Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to select one of the

items described in the table below and then use the

dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the setting.

Display:

Item name Setting Setting

Range

TONE:

Part tone

Specifies the instrument part

tone.

Part:

Part On/Off

Toggles an instrument between

sounding (on) and not sounding

(oFF).*2

oFF, on

Volume:

Part Volume

Specifies the instrument part

volume.

000 to 127

Pan:

Part Pan

Specifies whether the sound of

the part can be heard from the

left side or right side.

–64 to 00 to

+63*3

Rev.Send:

Part Reverb

Send

Specifies the level of reverb

(page E-31) applied to the

instrument part.

000 to 127

Cho.Send:

Part Chorus

Send

Specifies the level of chorus

(page E-31) applied to the

instrument part.

000 to 127

*1 You can select any preset tone except for the drawbar

organ and user tones. Only drum set sounds (tone

numbers J:129 through J:146) can be selected for drum

parts and percussion parts. Drum set sounds cannot be

selected for the bass and the Chord 1 through Chord 5

parts.

*2 You can temporarily sound the notes of individual parts, if

you want. For details, see step 5 under “To rehearse

before editing an existing rhythm” (page E-104).

*3 A smaller value shifts the pan position to the left while a

larger value shifts to the right. A value of zero specifies

center.

(3) To exit the mixer, press the C-7 (MIXER) button or the

R-15 (EXIT) button.

• This returns to the pattern sequencer screen.

CTK7300IN_e.book 107 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-108

If you want to record notes you play on the

keyboard in real time, perform the following

steps.

• The operation you can perform here depends on the

status (page E-103) of the currently selected part, as

described below.

If required, perform the procedure under “To

edit events with the pattern sequencer” (page

E-115).

• You can make fine corrections to the notes you played

on the keyboard and add new notes, if you want. For

details, see “Editing Individual Events (Event Editor)”

(page E-113).

For this status: You can perform this operation:

Fix Data Perform step (2) of the procedure below

to record new notes to replace the

instrument parts in the rec areas.

Recorded Data Perform step (2) of the procedure below

to over-record additional notes while

retaining note data previously recorded

for instrument part.

Empty Record all new notes (because the rec

areas are empty).

(1) Press the C-3 (RECORD) button.

• The button will start to flash and the Digital

Keyboard will enter record standby.

• You can press the C-3 (RECORD) button again

here to exit record standby (button goes from lit to

unlit).

(2) To start recording while the C-3 (RECORD) button

flashing, press the L-16 (START/STOP) button.

• This causes the button to change from flashing to

lit.

• If accompaniment pattern playback is stopped,

accompaniment pattern repeat playback (excluding

the instrument part being recorded) starts. Measure

and beat values in the lower right corner of the

display will count up along with playback until the

end of the accompaniment pattern is reached.

Then playback will restart from 001:1.

(3) Checking the timing (beat and measure) of the

playback of other parts, perform keyboard, PITCH

BEND (S-1) wheel, and S-2 (MODULATION) button

operations as required.

• The operations you perform are recorded. What

you record is played back when recording loops

back to the measure and beat where you recorded

a keyboard, pitch bend or modulation operation.

• To delete specific recorded notes, hold down the

C-10 (DELETE) button. When playback reaches

the note you want to delete, press the keyboard

that corresponds to the note to be deleted.

Holding down the C-10 (DELETE) button along

with one or more keyboard keys while playback is

being performed will delete all of the notes that

correspond to the keyboard keys as they played

while the button and keys are held down.

• Until you perform step (4) below, you can layer

keyboard notes and delete recorded notes as many

times as you like.

(4) To stop recording, press the C-3 (RECORD) button.

• This stops accompaniment pattern playback and

causes the button to go from lit to unlit. The

instrument part status will become “Recorded

Data”.

CTK7300IN_e.book 108 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-109

Repeat steps 4 through 7 for all of the parts you

want to edit.

• It is recommended that you save the rhythm as a user

rhythm each time you finish editing each

accompaniment pattern. For details about how to do

this, see “To store an edited or newly created rhythm”

(page E-111).

Repeat steps 3 through 8 to edit all of the

rhythm’s accompaniment patterns you want.

10.

After completing all of the editing you want,

adjust the tempo of the rhythm as desired.

• The tempo you set here becomes the initial default

tempo of the accompaniment pattern.

11.

For details about how to save the final version

of the rhythm as a user rhythm, see “To store

an edited or newly created rhythm” (page

E-111).

Press the C-5 (PATTERN SEQUENCER) button.

• This displays the pattern sequencer screen. For details

about screen contents, see step 2 under “To rehearse

before editing an existing rhythm” (page E-104).

Perform the procedure under “To clear all

instrument part rec areas included in an

accompaniment pattern” (page E-120).

• Select the accompaniment pattern you want to record

anew and then perform the clear operation.

Perform the procedure under “To configure

pattern rec settings (Rec Menu)” (page E-106).

• This step is not necessary if you want to perform

operations using initial default settings or if you want to

use previous settings without changing them.

Configure the accompaniment pattern number

of measure and beat settings.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the

instrument part you want to record.

To create a new accompaniment pattern

(1) While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button,

press the C-5 (EDIT) button to display the edit menu.

(2) Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“ElementEdit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the “ElementEdit” screen.

(3) Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to select one of the

items described in the table below and then use the

dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the setting.

Display: Item

name Setting Range

Measure: Number

of measures

INTRO, ENDING: 01 to 16

NORMAL, VARIATION: 01 to 16

NORMAL FILL-IN, VARIATION

FILL-IN: 01 to 02

Beat: Beat 2/4 to 4/4 to 8/4, 2/8 to 16/8

(4) Press the R-15 (EXIT) button twice to exit the edit

menu.

Currently selected instrument part

Currently selected instrument part status (page E-102)

Currently selected accompaniment pattern

CTK7300IN_e.book 109 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-110

Configure mixer settings for the selected

instrument part. You can skip this step if you do

not want to configure mixer settings.

• For details about mixer setting operations, see step 5

under “To edit an existing rhythm” (page E-107).

Configure part parameter settings for the

selected instrument part. You can skip this step

if you do not want to configure part parameter

settings.

• You also will be able to configure part parameter

settings after recording, if you want. If you want to

perform PITCH BEND (S-1) wheel operations while

recording, it is a good idea to configure the bend range

beforehand.

• For details, see “Configuring Instrument Part Playback

Settings (Part Parameters)” (page E-116).

If you want to record notes you play on the

keyboard in real time, perform the following

steps.

If required, perform the procedure under “To

edit events with the pattern sequencer” (page

E-115).

• You can make fine corrections to the notes you played

on the keyboard and add new notes, if you want. For

details, see “Editing Individual Events (Event Editor)”

(page E-113).

10.

Repeat steps 5 through 9 for all of the parts you

want to record.

11.

After completing all of the editing you want,

adjust the tempo of the rhythm as desired.

• The tempo you set here becomes the initial default

tempo of the accompaniment pattern.

12.

For details about how to save the final version

of the rhythm as a user rhythm, see “To store

an edited or newly created rhythm” (page

E-111).

(1) Press the C-3 (RECORD) button.

• The button will start to flash and the Digital

Keyboard will enter record standby.

• You can press the C-3 (RECORD) button again

here to exit record standby (button goes from lit to

unlit).

(2) To start recording while the C-3 (RECORD) button

flashing, press the L-16 (START/STOP) button.

• The button will change from flashing to lit, and the

display will show an up-count of measures and

beats. The count will re-start from 001:1 when the

final beat of the number of measures you specified

in step 4 is reached.

(3) Checking the timing (beat and measure) of the

playback, perform keyboard, PITCH BEND (S-1)

wheel, and S-2 (MODULATION) button operations as

required.

• The operations you perform are recorded. What

you record is played back when recording loops

back to the measure and beat where you recorded

a keyboard, pitch bend or modulation operation.

• To delete specific recorded notes, hold down the

C-10 (DELETE) button. When playback reaches

the note you want to delete, press the keyboard

that corresponds to the note to be deleted.

Holding down the C-10 (DELETE) button along

with one or more keyboard keys while playback is

being performed will delete all of the notes that

correspond to the keyboard keys that are played

while the button and keys are held down.

• Until you perform step (4) below, you can layer

keyboard notes and delete recorded notes as many

times as you like.

(4) To stop recording, press the C-3 (RECORD) button.

• This stops accompaniment pattern playback and

causes the button to go from lit to unlit. The

instrument part status will become “Recorded

Data”.

CTK7300IN_e.book 110 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-111

Press the C-5 (PATTERN SEQUENCER) button.

• This displays the pattern sequencer screen. For details

about screen contents, see step 2 under “To rehearse

before editing an existing rhythm” (page E-104).

Perform the procedure under “To clear all rec

areas included in the currently selected

rhythm” (page E-120).

Perform the procedure under “To configure

pattern rec settings (Rec Menu)” (page E-106).

• This step is not necessary if you want to perform

operations using initial default settings or if you want to

use previous settings without changing them.

Use buttons L-12 (INTRO) through L-15

(SYNCHRO/ENDING) to select the

accompaniment pattern you want to create

anew.

Perform steps 4 and 10 under “To create a new

accompaniment pattern” (page E-109).

Repeat steps 4 through 5 to create all of the

accompaniment patterns you want.

After completing all of the operations you want,

adjust the tempo of the rhythm as desired.

• The tempo you set here becomes the initial default

tempo of the accompaniment pattern.

For details about how to save the final version

of the rhythm as a user rhythm, see “To store

an edited or newly created rhythm” below.

While the pattern sequencer screen is on the

display after rhythm editing or creation is

complete, hold down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button as you press the C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays the pattern sequencer menu screen.

The 0 should be next to “Store”, so press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This displays a screen for specifying the destination

user rhythm number and rhythm name.

Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select

the destination user rhythm number you want.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the

cursor to the name character position you want

to change, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)

buttons to select the character you want.

• For details about the characters you can input, see

“Supported Input Characters” (page E-160).

• To input a space, press both of the R-14 (–, +) buttons

at the same time.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This stores the data.

• If the user rhythm number where you are storing the

data already has data stored to it, a message

(Replace?) will appear on the display to confirm

whether you want to overwrite the existing data with the

new data. Press the R-14 (YES) button to overwrite.

• The message “Please Wait” will remain on the display

while a data save operation is in progress. Do not

perform any other operation while it is displayed.

Turning off the Digital Keyboard or removing the

memory card can cause Digital Keyboard data to be

deleted or become corrupted. It also can cause the

Digital Keyboard to fail to turn on when the L-1 (P)

button is pressed. If this happens, refer to

“Troubleshooting” (page E-150).

To create a new rhythm from scratch

To store an edited or newly created rhythm

Destination user rhythm number

Rhythm name

CTK7300IN_e.book 111 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-112

• Pressing the R-15 (EXIT) button in place of the operation in

step 1 displays the confirmation screen shown below.

Pressing the R-14 (YES) button at this time will display the

user rhythm store screen in step 2.

To cancel the editor operation without saving the edited

results, press the R-14 (NO) button.

Press the C-5 (PATTERN SEQUENCER) button

to display the pattern sequencer screen.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays the pattern sequencer menu screen.

Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to

“Clear” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays a screen for specifying the number of the

rhythm you want to clear.

Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select

the user rhythm number you want to clear.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to clear or

the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

• The message “Please Wait” will remain on the display

while a data save operation is in progress. Do not

perform any other operation while it is displayed.

Turning off the Digital Keyboard or removing the

memory card can cause Digital Keyboard data to be

deleted or become corrupted. It also can cause the

Digital Keyboard to fail to turn on when the L-1 (P)

button is pressed. If this happens, refer to

“Troubleshooting” (page E-150).

You can combine instrument parts from different rhythms

(preset or user) to create a new user rhythm. You also can

use the mixer settings of each part to change the tone and

adjust volume.

Select the rhythm you want to edit in order to

create your user rhythm.

Press the C-5 (PATTERN SEQUENCER) button

to display the pattern sequencer screen.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-5 (EDIT) button to display

the edit menu.

The 0 should be next to “EasyEdit”, so press

the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This displays the EASY EDIT screen shown below.

Use buttons L-12 (INTRO) through L-15

(SYNCHRO/ENDING) to select the

accompaniment pattern you want to edit.

To clear user rhythm data

Creating a User Rhythm by

Combining Exiting Rhythm Parts

(Easy Edit)

To edit an existing rhythm with Easy Edit

Instrument part being edited

Rhythm number and rhythm name assigned to the instrument part

of the accompaniment pattern being edited (Default: Number and

name selected in step 1)

Accompaniment pattern being edited

CTK7300IN_e.book 112 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-113

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the

instrument part you want to edit.

Edit the selected accompaniment pattern

instrument part as desired.

• While performing the procedure below, you can press

the L-16 (START/STOP) button and perform repeat

playback of only the accompaniment pattern you are

editing. Each press of the L-16 (START/STOP) button

starts or stops playback.

• Performing rhythm assignment in step (1) above also

will automatically change mixer settings to the initial

defaults for the assigned rhythm. Because of this,

changing the rhythm after configuring mixer settings in

step (2) will cause the configured mixer settings to be

cleared.

• When INTRO or ENDING is selected as the

accompaniment pattern, the same rhythm is assigned

to all eight instrument parts. Because of this,

performing rhythm assignment in step (1) for an INTRO

or ENDING will change the rhythm of all instrument

parts at one time.

Repeat steps 5 through 7 to edit other

accompaniment patterns and instrument parts.

After editing is complete, adjust the tempo of

the rhythm as desired.

• The tempo you set here becomes the initial default

tempo.

10.

For details about how to save the final version

of the rhythm as a user rhythm, see “To store

an edited or newly created rhythm” (page

E-111).

The pattern sequencer records the keyboard, pitch bender,

and modulation operations recorded for each instrument part

as “events”. Playing a note on the keyboard, for example,

stores the following as events: note start measure, beat, and

track, note pitch, note length, and note intensity.

The following editing operations are supported for individual

events.

• Deleting events

• Inserting events

• Copying events within a specific range to a desired location

• Quantizing* note events

• Deleting pitch bender events

• Adjusting note event velocity values

• Adjusting note event gate time values

• Selecting the type of events that appear on the Event Editor

screen (View Select)

• Directly inputting note events (step input)

*Quantize is an operation that automatically adjusts the note

on timing of a note event to match a reference note.

• You can perform event editing on an instrument part

whose status (page E-103) is “Recorded Data” or

“Empty”. You cannot configure part parameters for an

instrument part whose status is “Fix Data”.

• Though you cannot perform event editing directly on

an instrument part whose status is “Fix Data”, you can

copy such an instrument part to a rec area and edit the

copied data. For details about the copy operation, see

“To copy preset or user rhythm instrument part data to

a rec area” (page E-119).

(1) While [RHYTHM] is displayed on the EASY EDIT

screen, specify the number of the rhythm you want to

assign to the instrument part of the selected

accompaniment pattern.

Settings are configured using the same procedures as

those for rhythm selection. Perform steps 1, 2, and 3

under “Playing an Auto Accompaniment” (page E-24).

Specifying rhythm number F:101 at this time makes it

possible to assign the rhythm data currently being

edited with the pattern sequencer.

(2) Configure the mixer settings of the selected

accompaniment pattern instrument part as desired.

• For details about mixer setting operations, see step

5 under “To edit an existing rhythm” (page E-107).

Editing Individual Events

(Event Editor)

CTK7300IN_e.book 113 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-114

The event editor screen shows the individual events recorded

to an instrument part as shown in the sample screen below.

• The event editor screen shows three events at one time.

The event in the middle line is the selected event. You can

change the value where the solid-line cursor is located. A

broken line under a setting value indicates that the cursor

can be moved to that value.

• The values in the format “001:01:00” at the beginning of the

event indicate the recording location (timing) of the event as

measure:beat:tick. A “tick” is a time unit that is shorter than

one beat. Pattern sequencer data uses 96 ticks per beat

(for 2/4 to 8/4) or 48 ticks per beat (for 2/8 to 16/8).

Pattern sequencer records three types of events: notes

(keyboard play), pitch bender operations, and modulation

operations. These events are represented on the screen as

described below.

●Notes

The note name is indicated to the right of the event location

information, followed by the gate time (note length), and

velocity (note speed) parameters. 1 shows an abbreviation of

the parameter name where the cursor is currently located.

●Pitch bender, modulation

“Bend” (pitch bender even) or “Mod” (modulation event) is

indicated to the right of the event location information,

followed by parameter value. “VALU” is displayed at 1 when

the cursor is located at a parameter value.

■Settings

*When “C-” is displayed, it indicates C-1 (one octave below

C0).

Event Editor Screen Contents

Event being edited (selected event)

Cursor

Events before (previous event) and after

(following event) the current event

Gate time (GATE)

Velocity (VEL)Note name (NOTE)

Event Parameters Setting Range

Note

Note name C- to C0 to G9*

Gate time 00:00 to 99:95

Velocity 001 to 127

Pitch Bender Pitch Bender –8192 to 0000 to +8191

Modulation Modulation 000 to 127

Event name (Bend or Mod)

Parameter value (VALU)

CTK7300IN_e.book 114 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-115

On the pattern sequencer screen, select the

“Recorded Data” or “Empty” status instrument

part whose events you want to edit.

• You can perform event editing on one of the following

types of parts.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-5 (EDIT) button to display

the edit menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“EventEdit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the event editor screen shown below. For

information about display contents, see “Event Editor

Screen Contents” (page E-114).

Perform the following operations.

To edit events with the pattern sequencer

– A “Recorded Data” or “Empty” status part that you

are currently editing using the procedure under “To

edit an existing rhythm” (page E-107)

– A “Recorded Data” or “Empty” status part that you

are currently editing using the procedure under “To

create a new rhythm from scratch” (page E-111)

– An “Empty” status part that has undergone one of

the procedures under “To clear all rec areas

included in the currently selected rhythm” (page

E-120), “To clear a rec area of an instrument part”

(page E-118), or “To clear all instrument part rec

areas included in an accompaniment pattern” (page

E-120)

– A “Recorded Data” status part that has undergone

the procedure under “To copy preset or user rhythm

instrument part data to a rec area” (page E-119)

To do this: Perform this procedure,

starting from step 2:

Change the settings of already

recorded event data

“To edit an existing event”

(page E-92)

Delete an individual event “To delete an individual event”

(page E-92)

Delete all events in a track “To delete all events in a track”

(page E-93)

Delete all events within a

specific range of the part being

edited

“To delete all events in a

specific range of a track” (page

E-93)

Insert events “To insert an event” (page

E-94)

Copy events within a specific

range to a desired location

“To copy the events within a

specific range to a desired

location” (page E-94)

Quantize an individual note

event

“To quantize an individual note

event” (page E-95)

Quantize all note events in the

part being edited

“To quantize all note events in

a track” (page E-96)

Quantize all note events in a

specific range of the part being

edited

“To quantize all note events

within specific range of a track”

(page E-96)

Delete pitch bender events “Deleting Pitch Bender Events”

(page E-97)

Step input of note events “To perform step input” (page

E-100)*1

Batch adjust the velocity

(intensity) of note events

included in the part being

edited

“To adjust the velocity value of

a note event” (page E-98)

Batch adjust the gate time

(length) of note events

included in the part being

edited

“To adjust the gate time value

of a note event” (page E-99)

Select the types of events that

appear on the event editor

screen

“To select the types of events

that appear on the Event Editor

screen (View Select)” (page

E-92)*2

*1 The “SysTrack” item on the input menu is not a pattern

sequencer event editor item.

*2 There are three view select setting items: Note,

PitchBend, and Modulation.

CTK7300IN_e.book 115 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-116

The settings in this section control how instruments parts you

are currently editing or creating are sounding when played

back as Auto Accompaniment after being saved as a user

rhythm. These settings are configured using the “PartPara”

(Part Parameter) item on the edit menu.

• You can configure part parameters for an instrument

part whose status (page E-103) is “Recorded Data” or

“Empty”. You cannot configure part parameters for an

instrument part whose status is “Fix Data”.

On the pattern sequencer screen, select the

“Recorded Data” or “Empty” status instrument

part whose part parameters you want to

configure.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-5 (EDIT) button to display

the edit menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“PartPara” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the “Part Para” screen.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to select one of

the items described in the table below and then

use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting.

• For details about each setting item, see “Pattern

Sequencer Part Parameters” (page E-117).

• You can configure only bend range settings for drum

and percussion parts.

After configuring the settings you want, press

the R-15 (EXIT) button twice.

• This returns to the pattern sequencer screen.

Configuring Instrument Part

Playback Settings

(Part Parameters)

To configure pattern sequencer part

parameters

Display: Item name Setting Range

Table: Chord conversion table 01 to 19

BreakPoint: Break Point C to B

Invert: Inversion oFF, on, 7th

Retrigger: Retrigger oFF, on

BendRange: Bend Range 00 to 12

CTK7300IN_e.book 116 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-117

■Table (Chord conversion table)

Recording of each accompaniment pattern is normally performed using C major (root of C, major type).* When playing an Auto

Accompaniment, you can use a root other than C and a chord type other than major, if you want. This is accomplished by using a

“chord conversion table” to convert the C major recorded data to another root and/or chord type. Regardless of what root or chord

type you specify, the currently selected chord table is used to make corrections to suit the instrument parts and the type of music

being played in order to ensure musically natural accompaniment.

*Depending on the rec menu “PlayChord” setting. For details, see “To configure pattern rec settings (Rec Menu)” (page E-106).

With this parameter, you can select from among the 19 types of chord conversion tables listed below.

Pattern Sequencer Part Parameters

Number Table Name Accompaniment

Pattern Parts Description

01 Bass Basic *1Bass Normally used for a bass part.

02 Bass f-root *1Bass Variation of number 01. Always makes the first note the root

note when changing chords.

03 Bass 7th *1Bass Used for a bass part recorded with a 7th chord.

04 Bass 7th f-root *1Bass Variation of number 03. Always makes the first note the root

note when changing chords.

05 Chord Basic *1Chord Normally used for a chord part.

06 Chord Var2 *1Chord Used for a chord part that has a tension chord.

07 Chord Var3 *1Chord

When a 7th chord is specified while playing, the 5th note is

converted to a 7th note. In the case of C7, for example, G

becomes Bb.

08 Chord Var4 *1Chord Variation of number 05 (Chord Basic).

09 Chord 7th *1Chord Used for a chord part recorded with a 7th chord.

10 Chord Minor *1Chord Used for a chord part recorded with a minor chord.

11 Phrase *1Chord Used for the chord part to which a phrase (such as a major

scale) was recorded.

12 Chord Minor *1Bass Used for a bass part recorded with a minor chord.

13 Chord Minor f-root *1Bass Variation of number 12. Always makes the first note the root

note when changing chords.

14 Penta Phrase *1Chord Used for a chord part recorded with a pentatonic scale phrase.

15 Intro n-minor *2Bass/chord When a minor chord is specified while playing, converts to a

natural minor.

16 Intro m-minor *2Bass/chord When a minor chord is specified while playing, converts to a

melodic minor (ascending).

17 Intro h-minor *2Bass/chord When a minor chord is specified while playing, converts to a

harmonic minor.

18 Intro no Change *2Bass/chord Recording of original as-is, with no minor/major conversion in

accordance with chord specified while playing.

19 Intro dorian *2Bass/chord When a minor chord is specified while playing, converts to a

dorian scale.

*1 For NORMAL, NORMAL FILL-IN, VARIATION, VARIATION FILL-IN

*2 For INTRO and ENDING

CTK7300IN_e.book 117 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-118

■BreakPoint (Break Point)

This parameter specifies the key, from C to B, that is the point

at which Auto Accompaniment bass and chord notes drop one

octave.

For example when F is specified as the break point, a C major

chord recorded as C3E3G3 (CEG) becomes D3F#3A3 (DF#A

raised one note each) when D is fingered on the chord

keyboard, E3G#3B3 (EG#B raised one note each) when E is

fingered, and F2A2C3 (FAC dropped one octave) when F is

fingered.

■Invert (Inversion)

This parameter specifies whether or not chords during Auto

Accompaniment play should mirror inverted forms of the

original chord (EGC and GCE for CEG).

For example, let’s say that the original recorded C major

chord is CEG and an F chord is fingered on the chord

keyboard. If “oFF” is selected for this setting, the chord will be

directly converted to FAC. If “on” (or “7th”) is selected, the

chord will be converted to CFA, which is the inverted form that

is nearest to CEG. The transition of chord notes during

playback when “on” (or “7th”) is selected is smaller, so

accompaniment sounds more natural.

Note that you should select “7th” in place of “on” only if “C7”

was specified for the “PlayChord” setting when recording the

accompaniment pattern and if you selected “09 (Chord 7th)”

for the chord conversion table.

*“PlayChord” is a rec menu setting. For details, see “To

configure pattern rec settings (Rec Menu)” (page E-106).

• When selecting “on” (or “7th”) for this setting, make sure

that you select “C” for the “BreakPoint” (Break Point)

setting.

■Retrigger (Retrigger)

This parameter specifies how accompaniment pattern play is

affected by a chord change that occurs part way through a

pattern.

When “on” is selected, the pattern “retriggers,” which causes

the currently playing note to change to the corresponding note

of the newly fingered chord. When “oFF” is selected, a chord

change causes the currently sounding note to be cut off, and

the next note of the pattern of the newly fingered chord to be

played.

■BendRange (Bend Range)

This parameter specifies the bend range for pitch bender

operation in semitone steps

While the pattern sequencer screen is

displayed, use buttons L-12 (INTRO) through

L-15 (SYNCHRO/ENDING) to select the

accompaniment pattern you want.

• The rec areas of the instrument parts included in the

accompaniment pattern you select here are the ones

that can be cleared by this procedure.

• If you select an INTRO or ENDING, the following steps

can be performed only when all parts are in rec areas

(“Recorded Data” or “Empty” part status).

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-5 (EDIT) button to display

the edit menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“PartEdit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the “Part Edit” screen.

The 0 should be next to “Clear”, so press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This displays the “Clear Part” screen.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to specify the

instrument part you want to clear from the rec

area then press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to clear or

the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

• Pressing the R-14 (YES) button changes the status of

the instrument part you specified in step 5 to “Empty”.

Instrument Part Operations

To clear a rec area of an instrument part

CTK7300IN_e.book 118 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-119

• This procedure copies note events only.

• You will not be able to perform this procedure if an

INTRO or ENDING is selected as the accompaniment

pattern.

• When a percussion part or drum part is specified as the

copy destination instrument part, you can specify a

percussion part or drum part as the copy source. When

a bass part or a chord part (chord 1 through chord 5) is

specified as the copy destination, you can specify a

bass part or a chord part (chord 1 through chord 5) as

the copy source. No other part combinations are

allowed.

While the pattern sequencer screen is

displayed, use the L-13 (NORMAL/FILL-IN) or

L-14 (VARIATION/FILL-IN) button to select an

accompaniment pattern, and the R-17 (u, i)

buttons to select an instrument part.

• The rec area of the accompaniment pattern/instrument

part included in the accompaniment pattern is the copy

destinations.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-5 (EDIT) button to display

the edit menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“PartEdit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the “Part Edit” screen.

Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to

“Copy” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the “Part Copy” screen.

Specify a rhythm number, accompaniment

pattern, and instrument part as the copy

destination.

• Use the R-17 (t, y, u, i) buttons to select one of

the items described in the table below and then use the

dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the setting.

After the settings are the way you want, press

the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to copy or

the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

• The copied instrument part status will become

“Recorded Data”.

To copy preset or user rhythm instrument

part data to a rec area

Display: Item name Setting Range

1Copy source rhythm

number

A:001 to F:100

2Copy source

accompaniment

pattern

normal (NORMAL),

nrmFil (NORMAL FILL-IN),

Variat (VARIATION),

VarFil (VARIATION FILL-IN)

3Copy source part Percus (Percussion),

Drum (Drums), Bass (Bass),

Chord1 to Chord5 (Chord 1 to

Chord 5)

CTK7300IN_e.book 119 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Pattern Sequencer

E-120

While the pattern sequencer screen is

displayed, hold down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button and press the C-5 (EDIT) button to

display the edit menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“ElementEdit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the “ElementEdit” screen.

The 0 should be next to “Clear”, so press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This displays the “Clear Element” screen.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to specify the

accompaniment pattern you want to clear and

then press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to clear or

the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

• Pressing the R-14 (YES) button changes the status of

all the instrument parts of the accompaniment pattern

you specified in step 4 to “Empty”.

• This procedure can be performed only when the status

of all of the instrument parts of the accompaniment

pattern is “Empty”.

While the pattern sequencer screen is

displayed, hold down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button and press the C-5 (EDIT) button to

display the edit menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“ElementEdit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the “ElementEdit” screen.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to select one of

the items described in the table below and then

use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting.

After the settings are the way you want, press

the R-15 (EXIT) button twice to return to the

pattern sequencer screen.

While the pattern sequencer screen is

displayed, hold down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button and press the C-5 (EDIT) button to

display the edit menu.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“AllEdit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the “All Edit” screen.

The 0 should be next to “Clear”, so press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to clear or

the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

• Pressing the R-14 (YES) button changes the status of

all the instrument parts of all the accompaniment

patterns to “Empty”.

Accompaniment Pattern and

Rhythm Operations

To clear all instrument part rec areas

included in an accompaniment pattern

To configure the accompaniment pattern

number of measure and beat settings

Display: Item name Setting Range

Measure:

Number of measures

INTRO, ENDING: 01 to 16

NORMAL, VARIATION: 01 to 16

NORMAL FILL-IN, VARIATION

FILL-IN: 01 to 02

Beat: Beat 2/4 to 4/4 to 8/4, 2/8 to 16/8

To clear all rec areas included in the

currently selected rhythm

CTK7300IN_e.book 120 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-121

Recording and Playing Audio

All of the sound output by the Digital Keyboard can be recorded as

audio files on a memory card. The maximum recording time for a

single audio file is approximately 13 minutes. Up to 20 audio files

(actual number of files depends on card capacity) can be recorded

on a single memory card.

• To perform the operations described in this section, you

will need to obtain a commercially available SD memory

card or SDHC memory card with a capacity between 2GB

and 32GB (page E-136).

• The audio recording operation performs memory card

delete and write operations simultaneously. Because of

this, you may not be able to record correctly on certain

types of memory cards. If you experience recording

problems, try changing the file number of the recording or

try using a different memory card.

With audio recording, you can record sound output by the Digital

Keyboard as digital sampling data. Recordings are stored on the

memory card as an audio file.

■Recording of Keyboard Play and Song Playback

The following can be recorded as-is.

• Rhythm mode keyboard play

You can record a keyboard performance that uses layer and

split, as well as Auto Accompaniment and music preset.

Registration setup recall, effect operations, and mixer

operations are also supported during recording.

• Song sequencer song playback

A song recorded with the song sequencer can be recorded to a

memory card file as it is played back. Most Digital Keyboard

operations that are supported during song playback are also

supported during recording to a memory card file.

■Recording of Sound Input from an External Device

Sound input from an external device connected to the Digital

Keyboard’s T-6 (MIC IN) jack or T-4 (INST IN) jack is recorded

along with notes played on the Digital Keyboard and sound that is

played back on the Digital Keyboard.

For details about the routes used for output of sound from this

Digital Keyboard’s built-in sound source and output of sound from

an external sound source, see the block diagram under

“Configuration of Effects” (page E-29).

• Input from the Digital Keyboard’s T-5 (AUDIO IN) jack is not

recorded.

This Digital Keyboard supports playback of audio files recorded by

it, as well as audio files that you converted on a computer to a

format supported by the Digital Keyboard.* You also can play

along on the keyboard during playback.

*Special application software (Data Manager) is required in

order to convert audio files. For details, see “Storing and

Loading Digital Keyboard Memory Data” (page E-146).

You can use the special application software (Data Manager) to

access audio files on a memory card from your computer. You can

store audio files to a computer local disk and use your computer to

convert audio files to a format that can be played back by the

Digital Keyboard. For details, see “Storing and Loading Digital

Keyboard Memory Data” (page E-146).

The following operations are not possible during audio recording

and playback.

• User rhythm editing (page E-103)

• User tone editing (page E-46)

• User drawbar organ tone editing (page E-52)

• User DSP data editing (page E-33)

• User preset editing (page E-58)

• Song sequencer recording and editing (page E-68)

• Registration setup save (page E-66)

• Card mode operations (page E-137)

Some other operations other than those listed above may also be

disabled.

• Do not touch a memory card loaded in the Digital Keyboard

while recording or playback is in progress. This can cause

operational problems due to electrostatic charge and creates

the risk of making the card unusable. Before touching the

loaded memory card, first stop any ongoing recording or

playback operation.

• Formatting a memory card on the Digital Keyboard will reserve

space for audio recording, which will reduce the total capacity

of the memory card. The amount of the reduction depends on

the maximum number of audio recordings that you specified

when formatting the memory card (page E-137). Using a

computer to open a memory card that has been formatted on

the Digital Keyboard will show this reduced capacity, even if

there are no files on the card. This is normal and does not

indicate malfunction of the memory card.

Audio Recording and Playback

Functions

Audio Recording

Audio Playback

Saving Audio Files on a Computer

Audio Recording and Playback

Precautions

Limitations during Recording and Playback

Memory Card Precautions

CTK7300IN_e.book 121 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Recording and Playing Audio

E-122

You can record keyboard play while in the rhythm mode or song sequencer mode.

• Recording is actually performed in the audio record mode, but you can switch between the rhythm mode screen and song

sequencer mode screen from the audio record mode screen. A : or < indicator on the display indicates whether

the rhythm mode screen or song sequencer mode screen is selected.

• Normally the audio record screen is displayed in the audio record mode, but you can switch to the rhythm mode screen or song

sequencer mode screen temporarily when you need to perform operations there. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to switch

between the audio record screen and the rhythm mode screen or sequencer mode screen.

• You can use the C-9 (CARD) and C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) buttons to switch between the rhythm mode screen and song

sequencer mode screen while in the audio record mode.

For details about navigating between modes and how to switch between screens, see “Navigating between Modes and Screens

during Recording Standby and Recording” (page E-125).

Performing Audio Recording

Modes that Support Audio Recording

C-4 (SONG

SEQUENCER) button

R-17 (t, y)

buttons

R-17 (t, y)

buttons

Audio record mode

Rhythm mode Song sequencer mode

C-9 (CARD) button

Audio record screen

Rhythm mode screen

Audio record screen

Song sequencer mode screen

CTK7300IN_e.book 122 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Recording and Playing Audio

E-123

Referring to “Audio Recording” (page E-121),

determine what type of performance you want

to record.

If you plan to use a microphone, CD player or

some other external device as a sound source

during recording, turn off both the external

device and the Digital Keyboard and then

connect them.

• For details about connections, see “Outputting Input

from an External Device or a Microphone through the

Digital Keyboard’s Speakers” (page E-12).

Turn on the keyboard.

On the Digital Keyboard, format a memory card.

• For details, see “Formatting a Memory Card” (page

E-137).

Press the R-15 (EXIT) button to return to the

rhythm mode from the card mode.

• If you have a memory card that you previous formatted

on the Digital Keyboard, skip steps 4 and 5, and simply

insert the card into the card slot (T-1). For details, see

“Loading and Removing a Memory Card” (page E-137).

This completes preparation for recording. Next, perform the

“To record play in the rhythm mode” below or the “To record

play in the song sequencer mode” procedure (page E-125).

Perform the procedure under “To get ready for

audio recording” (page E-123).

• This enters the rhythm mode.

Select a tone and rhythm, and configure other

settings for the song you plan to record.

Press the C-2 (AUDIO RECORD) button.

• This cause the > indicator to flash, which indicates

the audio record mode.

• The C-2 (AUDIO RECORD) button will also start

flashing, which indicates audio record standby.

• The audio record screen like the one shown below will

appear on the display.

• The time counter shows how much time

(minutes:seconds) has elapsed since the start of

recording. You also can switch display contents to

show the tempo, measure, and beat, if you want as

described below.

• If there is an asterisk (*) in front of the audio file

number, it means the file already includes recorded

data. Starting recording while a file that already

contains recorded data is selected will cause the old

data to be overwritten by the new recording.

L-12L-12 C-17C-17

L-15L-15

L-16L-16

L-17L-17

L-14L-14

L-13L-13

R-15R-15

R-17R-17

R-13R-13

R-16R-16

R-14R-14

C-6C-6

C-4C-4

C-2C-2 C-9C-9

To get ready for audio recording To record play in the rhythm mode

Audio file number

Audio file name Time counter (minutes:seconds)

CTK7300IN_e.book 123 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Recording and Playing Audio

E-124

If required, perform the steps below to switch

from the time counter screen to the tempo,

measure, beat screen. If you want to leave the

time counter displayed, go straight to step 5.

Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select

an audio file number.

To start recording, press the C-2 (AUDIO

RECORD) button.

• If the file number you selected in step 5 does not have

an asterisk (*) next to it, the C-2 (AUDIO RECORD)

button will change from flashing to lit and recording will

start. Start to play what you want.

• If you selected a file number with an asterisk (*) in front

of it in step 5, a file overwrite confirmation screen like

the one shown below will appear.

If you do not want to overwrite the file, press the R-14

(NO) button. This will return to step 5 of this procedure

where you can select a different audio file number.

If you do want to overwrite the file, press the R-14 (YES)

button. Recording will start and the C-2 (AUDIO

RECORD) button will change from flashing to lit. Start to

play what you want.

To quit recording, press the C-2 (AUDIO

RECORD) button again.

• This will cause the button to change from lit to unlit and

end recording.

• The > indicator will stop flashing on the display to

indicate the audio play mode.

• Pressing the L-16 (PLAY/STOP) button here will stop

recording and start playback of the audio file. For

details about audio file playback, see “Playing Back

Audio” (page E-126).

• To exit the audio play mode, press the C-6 (AUDIO

PLAY) button.

• During audio record standby, you can exit the audio record

mode by pressing the R-15 (EXIT) button.

• If you switch from the time counter to tempo, measure, beat

in step 4 of the procedure above, the count up operation will

begin when song (when in the song sequencer mode) or

rhythm (when in the rhythm mode) playback is started.

• The time counter (or tempo, measure, beat display) will

start to flash when there are 30 seconds of remaining

recording time. Recording will stop automatically when the

end of remaining recording time is reached.

(1) While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button,

press the C-17 (MENU) button.

This displays a screen like the one shown below.

(2) Use the R-17 (y) button to move the thick brackets

(%) to “Measure Beat” and then press the R-15

(EXIT) button.

This switches from the time counter to the tempo,

measure, beat screen.

To return to the time counter screen, the R-17 (t)

button in step (2) to move the thick brackets (%) to

“Recording Time” and then press the R-15 (EXIT)

button.

Flashing (Record standby) Lit (Recording)

CTK7300IN_e.book 124 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Recording and Playing Audio

E-125

Perform the procedure under “To get ready for

audio recording” (page E-123).

• This enters the rhythm mode.

Perform steps 1 through 4 under “To perform

using a music preset” (page E-54).

• This enters music preset record standby.

Perform steps 3 through 6 under “To record

play in the rhythm mode” (page E-123) to start

recording.

Perform steps 5 through 7 under “To perform

using a music preset” (page E-54).

To quit recording, press the C-2 (AUDIO

RECORD) button.

Perform the procedure under “To get ready for

audio recording” (page E-123).

• This enters the rhythm mode.

Perform steps 1 through 3 under “To play a

recorded song” (page E-79) to prepare for song

playback.

• This enters the song sequencer mode.

Perform steps 3 through 6 under “To record

play in the rhythm mode” (page E-123) to start

recording.

Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button to start

song playback.

To quit recording, press the C-2 (AUDIO

RECORD) button.

You can use the operations in this section to navigate

between modes and screens while recording.

■Rhythm Mode Operations (: indicator

displayed)

Operations in the Rhythm Mode

• You can use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to switch between

the audio record screen and the rhythm mode screen.

• While the audio record screen is displayed, press the C-9

(CARD) button to display the rhythm mode screen.

Displaying the Song Sequencer Mode Screen from the

Rhythm Mode Screen

• While the audio record screen or rhythm mode screen is

displayed, press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to

display the song sequencer mode screen. This will cause

the : indicator to disappear from the display and the

< indicator to appear.

■Song Sequencer Mode Operations (<

indicator displayed)

Operations in the Song Sequencer Mode

• You can use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to switch between

the audio record screen and the song sequencer mode

screen.

• While the song sequencer mode screen is displayed, press

the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to display the audio

record screen.

Displaying the Rhythm Mode Screen from the Song

Sequencer Mode Screen

• While the audio record screen or song sequencer mode

screen is displayed, press the C-9 (CARD) button to display

the rhythm mode screen. This will cause the <

indicator to disappear from the display and the :

indicator to appear.

• While the audio record screen or rhythm mode screen is

displayed, press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to

display the rhythm mode screen. This will cause the

< indicator to disappear from the display and the

: indicator to appear. The screen content does not

change at this time.

To record play using a music preset

To record play in the song sequencer mode

Navigating between Modes and Screens

during Recording Standby and Recording

CTK7300IN_e.book 125 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Recording and Playing Audio

E-126

• You can start audio playback operations from the rhythm

mode or the song sequencer mode. You cannot start from

the card mode.

• You can perform normal keyboard play along with audio

playback, and you can use layer and split. The procedures

for selecting UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and LOWER parts are

the same as the ones used in the rhythm mode. For details,

see “Selecting a Tone” (page E-14) and “Layering and

Splitting Tones” (page E-15).

• Maximum polyphony is reduced by a maximum of two

notes during audio playback.

• Rhythm play and song sequencer song playback cannot be

performed during audio playback standby and audio

playback.

• The time counter displayed during audio playback does not

exactly match the time counter displayed during recording.

This Digital Keyboard supports playback of audio files

recorded by it, as well as audio files that you converted on a

computer to a format supported by the Digital Keyboard.*

*Special application software (Data Manager) is required in

order to convert audio files. For details, see “Storing and

Loading Digital Keyboard Memory Data” (page E-146).

Press the C-6 (AUDIO PLAY) button.

• This causes the > indicator to appear and the other

mode indicator (: or <) to disappear

from the display, which indicates the audio play mode.

• The L-16 (PLAY/STOP) button will flash, which

indicates audio playback standby.

• The audio playback screen shown below will be on the

display.

• If there is an asterisk (*) in front of the audio file

number, it means the file already includes recorded

data.

Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select

one the audio file numbers that has an asterisk

(*) in front of it.

Configure the following setting as required.

*For details, see “About center cancel” (page E-127).

Playing Back Audio

Supported Audio Playback Files

To play back a recorded audio file

To do this: Do this:

Start playback from

any location

(minutes : seconds)

Use the L-14 (dFF) and L-13

(sREW) buttons to change the time

counter reading to the location

(hours:minutes) from which you want

to start playback.

Center cancel*Press the L-17 (PART SELECT)

button.

Audio file number

Audio file name Time counter (minutes:seconds)

CTK7300IN_e.book 126 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Recording and Playing Audio

E-127

Press the L-16 (PLAY/STOP) button.

• This will start playback of the audio file and cause the

L-16 (PLAY/STOP) button to change from flashing to

lit. The time counter also will start counting up.

• The following operations are supported during

playback.

*Dial operation is supported only while the audio play screen

is displayed.

• Playback stops automatically when it reaches the end

of a song. To stop playback part way through, press the

L-16 (PLAY/STOP) button.

To exit the audio play mode, press the C-6

(AUDIO PLAY) button.

• This returns to the mode screen (rhythm mode or song

sequencer mode) that was displayed before you

performed step 1 of this procedure.

• During audio record standby, you can exit the audio play

mode by pressing the R-15 (EXIT) button.

• During the above operation, you can press the C-6 (AUDIO

PLAY) button to exit the audio play mode.

■About center cancel

Center cancel can be used to cut out the vocal part (which is

normally located in the center of the stereo field) from an

audio file stored to a memory card from your computer. How

successful center cancel is in cutting out the audio depends

on the audio file you are playing back.

Each press of the L-17 (PART SELECT) button toggles

between center cancel and normal (no center cancel)

playback. The current setting can be determined by checking

the graphic formed inside the level indicator as shown below.

• When the MIC/INST parameter (page E-42) “Pan” setting is

“0” (initial default value), center cancel is applied to all

sound recorded from an external device connected to the

T-6 (MIC IN) jack or the T-4 (INST IN) jack.

To perform this

operation: Do this:

Fast forward Hold down the L-14 (dFF) button or

rotate the dial to the right.*

Fast backward Hold down the L-13 (sREW) button

or rotate the dial to the left.*

Pause Press the L-15 (PAUSE) button.

Restart paused

playback

Press the L-15 (PAUSE) button.

Lower playback

volume

Press the R-14 (–) button, which will

display a volume setting screen.

Rotating the dial to the left while this

screen is displayed also will lower

playback volume.

Raise playback

volume

Press the R-14 (+) button, which will

display a volume setting screen.

Rotating the dial to the right while this

screen is displayed also will raise

playback volume.

Center cancel Press the L-17 (PART SELECT)

button.

Status Playback standby Playback in

progress

Normal

Center cancel

CTK7300IN_e.book 127 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Recording and Playing Audio

E-128

Perform steps 1 through 4 under “To play back

a recorded audio file” (page E-126) to start

playback.

When playback reaches the location you want

to specify as the repeat start point, press the

L-12 (REPEAT) button.

• This will display a screen like the one shown below,

which shows the start point you specified

(minutes:seconds) and the flashing ? indicator.

When playback reaches the location you want

to specify as the repeat end point, press the

L-12 (REPEAT) button again.

• This will immediately return to the start point you

specified in step 2 and start repeat playback. At this

time a screen like the one shown below showing the

end point you specified (minutes:seconds) will be

displayed first. After a few seconds, the display will

change to the original audio play screen.

• The ? indicator will be on the display while repeat

playback is in progress.

• The operations you can perform during repeat playback

are the same as those that are supported during normal

playback. For details, see step 4 under “To play back a

recorded audio file” (page E-126).

To cancel repeat playback, first press the L-16

(PLAY/STOP) button to stop it. Next, press the

L-12 (REPEAT) button.

• This causes the ? indicator to disappear from the

display.

Press the C-6 (AUDIO PLAY) button to enter the

audio play mode.

Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to display

the audio file number of the file you want to

rename.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) to display the

audio play menu.

The 0 should be next to “Rename”, so press

the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This displays the “Rename” screen.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the

cursor to the name character position you want

to change, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)

buttons to select the character you want.

• For details about the characters you can input, see

“Supported Input Characters” (page E-160).

• To input a space, press both of the R-14 (–, +) buttons

at the same time.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to change

the name or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel and

return to the audio play screen.

• Pressing the R-15 (EXIT) button without pressing the

R-14 button will return to the screen in step 5 of this

procedure.

To repeat play a specific phrase To rename an audio file

CTK7300IN_e.book 128 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Recording and Playing Audio

E-129

Press the C-6 (AUDIO PLAY) button to enter the

audio play mode.

Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to display

the audio file you want to clear or delete.

• To clear the audio data in a file, display the number of

the file. File numbers run from 001 up to the maximum

number of audio recordings that you specified when

formatting the memory card (page E-137). In this case,

the file itself will not be deleted.

• To delete a file, display an audio file other than those

described above (audio file saved to the memory card

using Data Manager*).

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button to display

the audio play menu.

Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to

“Clear” (or “Delete”) and then press the R-16

(ENTER) button.

In response to the confirmation message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to perform

the applicable operation or the R-14 (NO) button

to cancel.

To clear the data of an audio file or delete an

audio file

*For details, see “Storing and Loading Digital

Keyboard Memory Data” (page E-146).

CTK7300IN_e.book 129 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-130

Using the Function Menu

The function menu includes settings that normally need to be

accessed relatively infrequently, such as overall tuning,

equalizer, touch response, local control on/off, etc. It also

includes some memory card operations (format, etc.).

This section explains function menu operations. For details

about specific function menu items, see “Function Menu

Settings” (page E-131).

Press the R-13 (FUNCTION) button.

• This displays the function menu like the one shown

below.

To adjust the “Tune” (Tuning) and “EQ”

(Equalizer) settings, use the R-17 (t, y)

buttons to move the 0 to the setting you want

to adjust, use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons

to change the setting. The currently selected

setting will also be indicated by thick brackets

(%).

• Pressing the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time

returns the setting to its initial default.

• Changing the tuning value does not affect audio

playback (page E-126).

The setting items from “Performance” and

below are groups that include multiple setting

items. Use the following procedure to change

the settings of the items in each group.

R-18R-18

C-17C-17

R-15R-15

R-17R-17

R-13R-13

R-16R-16

R-14R-14

L-3L-3

Using the Function Menu

To change the setting of a function menu

item

(1) Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to the

desired group name and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the items included within the group.

(2) Use the R-17 (t, y, u, i) buttons to move the 0

to the setting you want to change.

(3) Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting value.

• Pressing the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time

returns an item to its initial default setting.

(4) To return to the function menu, press the R-15 (EXIT)

button.

Example: Performance group

CTK7300IN_e.book 130 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Function Menu

E-131

To exit the function menu, press the R-13

(FUNCTION) button or R-15 (EXIT) button.

• Note that all function menu settings you configure are

returned to their initial defaults whenever you turn off

the Digital Keyboard. You can configure the Digital

Keyboard so it remembers its latest settings or to apply

predetermined default settings each time you turn it on.

For details, see “AutoResume (Auto Resume)” (page

E-134) and “Default (Default Settings)” (page E-134).

• Some function menu settings also can be saved to

registration memory. For details, see “Saving

Keyboard Setups to Registration Memory” (page E-66).

This section explains the meaning of each function menu

setting item, and provides information about setting ranges

and initial default values.

• For each item, the initial default setting is indicated by an

asterisk (*).

Fine tunes the overall keyboard tuning in 0.1 Hz steps.

A4=415.5 - 440.0* - 465.9 Hz

• Changing the tuning value does not affect audio playback

(page E-126).

One of ten presets can be selected to change the overall

frequency characteristics of the sound.

Function Menu Settings

Tune (Tuning)

EQ (Equalizer)

oFF :Equalizer off

Soft :Suppressed high tones for a softer sound

Bright :Enhanced high tones for a brighter sound

B.Boost :Enhanced low tones (Bass Boost)

Powerful :Enhanced volume

MegaVol1*:Tone optimized for maximum volume

MegaVol2 :Tone optimized for maximum volume, with more

emphasis on the bass drum than MegaVol1

HLBoost :Boosted high and low tones for good clarity even

at low volumes

LineOut1 :Completely flat tone for Line Out and headphone

use (Intended for a full-performance PA and

high-end headphones.)

LineOut2 :Slightly compensated high-range and low-range

tones for Line Out and headphones (Intended for

small household speakers and general purpose

headphones.)

Lights

CTK7300IN_e.book 131 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Function Menu

E-132

• You can directly display this group screen without going

through the function menu. While the initial power on

screen is displayed, hold down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button as you press the C-17 (MENU) button.

Select one of the settings below to specify the relationship

between key pressure and note volume.

Specifies the velocity value setting when the Touch setting is

off.

000 - 100* - 127

■Ped.Assign (Pedal Assign)

Specifies the operation of the pedal connected to T-3

(SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK).

■Upper1, Upper2, Lower, A.HAR.

These settings specially on* (effect applied) or oFF (effect not

applied) for the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER, and Auto

Harmonize parts for the operation currently assigned to the

pedal.

• When the Pedal Assign setting is “rHy”, the on/off settings

of these parts are disabled, and the pedal functions as a

rhythm start/stop switch.

Specifies the range of pitch change that occurs when the

PITCH BEND wheel (S-1) is rotated.

00 - 02* - 24 semitones

Specifies the how arpeggio is played in accordance with

pressed keyboard keys when the arpeggiator (page E-23) is

being used.

• When “on” is selected for this setting, you can turn off

arpeggio play pressing the R-18 (AUTO HARMONIZE/

ARPEGGIATOR) button to disable the arpeggiator, or you

can change this setting to “oFF”.

Specifies how many times notes or chords should sound

within one beat for arpeggio phrases played by the

arpeggiator (page E-23).

1, 2, 2S, 3, 4*, 4S, 6, 8

The setting value indicates the number of times within one

beat. Selecting an option that is only a value will sound the

note that number of times within one beat. Selecting “4”, for

example, will play with the rhythm 7777.

Selecting an option that includes the letter “S” will play a

shuffle. 2S plays and 4S plays .

• The availability of the settings for this item depends on the

arpeggiator type. Refer to the separate “Appendix” for

details.

Specifies whether arpeggiator play with the tone of any part

should be used for the UPPER part keyboard or LOWER part

keyboard when the arpeggiator (page E-23) is used while the

keyboard is used while Layer and/or Split is turned on (page

E-15).

• If “U2” is selected, arpeggios are played when Layer is on

(page E-16).

• If “Low” is selected, arpeggios are played when Split is on

(page E-16).

Performance (Performance/Accompaniment)

Group

Touch (Touch Response)

oFF : Constant note volume regardless of keyboard pressure

1*:Normal

2: Strong sound even with light pressure

TchOffVel (Touch Off Velocity)

Ped.Setting (Pedal Setting)

SUS*: Sustain pedal

SSt : Sostenuto pedal

SFt : Soft pedal

rHy : Rhythm start/stop switch

Upper1 : UPPER 1

Upper2 : UPPER 2

Lower :LOWER

A.HAR. : Auto Harmonize

BendRange (Bend Range)

ArpegHold (Arpeggiator Hold)

oFF*: Arpeggio played while the keys of a chord are

depressed on the keyboard

on : Arpeggio played after keyboard keys are released

ArpegSpeed (Arpeggiator Speed)

ArpegPart (Arpeggiator Part)

U12*: UPPER part keyboard, Upper 1 and Upper 2 tones

played.

U1 : UPPER part keyboard, Upper 1 tone played.

U2 : UPPER part keyboard, Upper 2 tone played.

Low : LOWER part keyboard, Lower tone played.

26 6767

CTK7300IN_e.book 132 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Function Menu

E-133

Specifies if accompaniment settings are recalled (oFF*) when

a registration setup (page E-66) is recalled, or if

accompaniment settings are not recalled (on).

Specifies if scale settings are recalled (oFF) when a

registration setup (page E-66) is recalled, or if scale settings

are not recalled (on*).

• You can directly display this group screen without going

through the function menu. While in the card mode (page

E-137), hold down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you

press the C-17 (MENU) button.

Specifies if a pre-count should sound (on) when playback of a

song file is started in the card mode (page E-137) or if a

pre-count should not sound (oFF*).

Specifies if a single song file should be repeat played (on)

during playback in the card mode (page E-137) or if a song file

should not be repeat played (oFF*).

You can batch save all user data in Digital Keyboard memory

to a memory card, or load all user data from a memory card to

Digital Keyboard memory.

See “To batch save all Digital Keyboard data to a memory

card” (page E-139) and “To batch load all Digital Keyboard

memory data from a memory card” (page E-140) for more

information.

See “Formatting a Memory Card” (page E-137).

See “To delete a file from a memory card” (page E-141).

See “To rename a file on a memory card” (page E-141).

• For details about “parts” mentioned here, see “How Parts

are Organized” (page E-36).

Adjusts the Auto Accompaniment volume level (master

volume of parts A09 through A16). This setting does not affect

the keyboard volume level (parts A01 through A03).

000 - 115* - 127

Adjusts the master volume of song file playback in the card

mode (page E-137). This setting does not affect the keyboard

volume level (parts A01 through A03) or Auto Accompaniment

volume level (parts A09 through A16).

000 - 127*

Adjusts the metronome volume. This setting is linked with the

A08 part volume (part volume) that can be adjusted with the

mixer (page E-36).

000 - 100* - 127

Adjusts volume when playing back an audio file with audio

playback (page E-121).

000 - 127*

RegFltAcmp (Registration Filter: Accompaniment)

RegFltScal (Registration Filter: Scale)

Play/CardUtl (Playback, Card Utility) Group

PreCount (Song Pre-count Sound)

SongRepeat (Song Repeat Play)

AllData (All Data)

CardFormat (Card Format)

FileDelete (File Delete)

FileRename (File Rename)

Volume (Volume) Group

AccompVol. (Auto Accompaniment Volume)

SongVol. (Song Volume)

MetroVol. (Metronome Volume)

AudioVol. (Audio Volume)

CTK7300IN_e.book 133 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Function Menu

E-134

Selects the channel for sending keyboard play MIDI data to an

external device (keyboard channel).

01* - 16

Specifies whether pressing a key sounds the internal sound

source (on*) or whether the keyboard and internal sound

source should be disconnected (oFF).

Specifies if Auto Accompaniment MIDI data should be sent to

an external device (on) or not sent to an external device

(oFF*).

Turns speaker output on or off.

Select “on*” to enable output from the Digital Keyboard’s

speakers or “oFF” to disable speaker output. Output continues

to be performed from the T-9 (PHONES) and T-8 (LINE OUT)

jacks even when “oFF” is selected for this setting.

A pointer indicator is displayed next to SP.OFF when “oFF” is

selected for this item.

Adjusts display contrast.

01 - 09* - 17

Specifies if Auto Power Off (page E-13) is enabled (on*) or

disabled (oFF). Even when “on” is selected for this setting,

you can temporarily disable Auto Power Off by holding down

the L-3 ([A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE) button as you press the

L-1 (P) button to turn on power.

Specifies whether the Digital Keyboard should remember its

setup when turned off and restore it the next time it is turned

on.

• For information about the setting items that are restored

when Auto Resume is enabled, see “Parameter List” (page

E-162).

• Initially, power on default settings are the same as the

factory default settings. You also can use the procedure

below to specify other power on default settings to suit your

needs.

You can use this setting item to do the following.

• Rewrite the power on default settings with the Digital

Keyboard’s current setup (registering default settings).

• Return the power on default settings to the factory default

settings (clearing default settings).

■To register or clear default settings

Press the R-13 (FUNCTION) button to display

the function menu.

Use the R-17 (i, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“General” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“Default” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the default setting screen like the one

shown below.

MIDI Group

KeyboardCh (Keyboard Channel)

LocalCtrl (Local Control)

AccompOut (Accompaniment MIDI Out)

General (Other) Group

Speaker (Speaker ON/OFF)

Contrast (LCD Contrast)

AutoPower (Auto Power Off)

AutoResume (Auto Resume)

oFF*: Restores power on defaults when power is turned on.

on : Remembers setup when power is turned off and

restores it when power is turned back on.

Default (Default Settings)

CTK7300IN_e.book 134 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using the Function Menu

E-135

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to select the

operation you want.

• For information about the setting items that are

registered as default settings, see “Parameter List”

(page E-162).

After everything is the way you want, press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

• The message “Complete” appears and the display

returns to the screen before you pressed the R-16

(ENTER) button in step 3.

To exit the function menu, press the R-13

(FUNCTION) button.

• If you want the default settings to be restored whenever

power is turned on, select “oFF” for the “AutoResume”

setting (page E-134).

This item can be used to initialize all data and settings, or

parameter settings only.

• For information about what settings are initialized when

“Parameter” is selected for initialization in step 4 of the

procedure below, see “Parameter List” (page E-162).

■To initialize all data and settings (or parameter

settings only)

Press the R-13 (FUNCTION) button to display

the function menu.

Use the R-17 (i, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“General” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

Use the R-17 (i, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“Initialize” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the initialize screen like the one shown

below.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to select either

“All” (all settings) or “Parameter” (parameter

settings only).

To execute initialization, press the R-16

(ENTER) button.

To do this: Move the 0 here:

Return the power on default settings

to the factory default settings (clearing

default settings).

Clear

Rewrite the power on default settings

with the Digital Keyboard’s current

setup (registering default settings).

Store

Initialize (Initialize)

CTK7300IN_e.book 135 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-136

Using a Memory Card

You can save Digital Keyboard user area data to a memory

card and load data from a memory card to Digital Keyboard

memory. You also can play music files (MIDI files) stored on a

memory card on the Digital Keyboard.

• Use a memory card that satisfies the

conditions below.

Format: SDHC or SD

Capacity: 2GB to 32GB

Use of any memory cards other than

those defined above is not

supported.

• SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

■Data that can be saved to and exported from a

memory card

*Save only.

• For information about saving and importing individual data

items, see “Saving Digital Keyboard Data to a Memory

Card” (page E-138) and “Loading Data from a Memory

Card” (page E-140).

• For details about saving and loading all data, see “To batch

save all Digital Keyboard data to a memory card” (page

E-139) and “To batch load all Digital Keyboard memory

data from a memory card” (page E-140).

■Data that can be directly played back from a

memory card

• Be sure to observe the precautions provided in the

documentation that comes with the memory card.

• Memory cards have a write-protect switch. Use it when you

want to protect the data on the card from accidental

deletion.

• Avoid using a memory card under the following conditions.

Such conditions can corrupt data stored on the memory

card.

– Areas subjected to high temperature, high humidity, or

corrosive gas.

– Areas subjected to strong electrostatic charge and digital

noise.

• Never touch the contacts of a memory card when loading it

or removing it from the Digital Keyboard.

• The message “Please Wait” will remain on the display while

a data save operation is in progress. Do not perform any

other operation while it is displayed.

Turning off the Digital Keyboard or removing the memory

card can cause Digital Keyboard data to be deleted or

become corrupted. It also can cause the Digital Keyboard

to fail to turn on when the L-1 (P) button is pressed. If this

happens, refer to “Troubleshooting” (page E-150).

• Never insert anything besides a memory card into the card

slot. Doing so creates the risk of malfunction.

C-9C-9

C-17C-17

R-17R-17

R-13R-13

R-16R-16

R-14R-14

Supported Data Types

Data Type Description

(File Name Extension)

User rhythm data

(page E-103)

Auto Accompaniment data edited

with this Digital Keyboard (AC7)

User tone data

(page E-44)

Tone data edited with this Digital

Keyboard (TN7)

User drawbar organ tone data

(page E-52)

Drawbar organ tone data edited with

this Digital Keyboard (DB7)

User DSP data

(page E-33)

DSP data edited with this Digital

Keyboard (DS7)

User preset data

(page E-58)

Music preset data edited on this

Digital Keyboard (MPS)

Song sequencer data

(page E-68)

Song data edited with this Digital

Keyboard (CMS, MID*)

Registration data

(page E-66)

This Digital Keyboard’s panel

settings (RM7)

All data All the above data (AL7)

Data Type Description

(File Name Extension)

Song files

(page E-142)

SMF format 0 or 1 MIDI files (MID)

Card and Card Slot Precautions

CTK7300IN_e.book 136 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using a Memory Card

E-137

• Electrostatic charge from your fingers or the memory card

to the card slot can cause malfunction of the Digital

Keyboard. If this happens, turn the Digital Keyboard off and

then back on again.

• A memory card can become quite warm after very long use

in the card slot. This is normal and does not indicate

malfunction.

• A memory card must be positioned correctly when

being loaded into the Digital Keyboard. Trying to force

an improperly oriented memory card into the slot can

damage the memory card and the slot.

With the top of the memory card facing

upwards (so you can see it), carefully insert it

into the Digital Keyboard’s SD card slot (T-1)

until stops with a click.

To remove the memory card first press it into

the slot further.

• This will cause the memory card to disengage and eject

partially. Pull the memory card the rest of the way out of

the slot.

Enter the card mode when you want to perform memory card

operations.

• While in the rhythm mode (page E-7) press the C-9 (CARD)

button to enter the card mode.

This will cause the : indicator to disappear from the

display and the ; indicator to appear.

If the message “No Card” appears on the display, it means

there is no memory card in the card slot. For details about

what appears on the display while a card is loaded, see

“Playing a Music File from a Memory Card” (page E-142).

• To exit the card mode, press the C-9 (CARD) button again.

This will cause the ; indicator to disappear from the

display and the : indicator to appear.

• Format a memory card before using it for the first time.

• Before formatting a memory card, make sure it does

not have any valuable data stored on it.

• The memory card format operation performed by this

Digital Keyboard is a “quick format”. If you want to

completely delete all of the data on the memory card,

format it on your computer or some other device.

Insert the memory card you want to format into

the Digital Keyboard’s card slot.

• Make sure the memory card is write-enabled. Check

the position of the card’s write-protect switch to ensure

it is not in the write-protect position.

Press the C-9 (CARD) button to enter the card

mode.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays the function menu “Play/CardUtl” screen.

Loading and Removing a Memory

Card

Top

Entering the Card Mode

Formatting a Memory Card

CTK7300IN_e.book 137 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using a Memory Card

E-138

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“CardFormat”.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This will display a value indicating the maximum

number of audio recordings that can be recorded.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the

number of audio recordings you want to format

the card for.

• You can format a 2GB card for up to 14 songs. A 4GB

to 32GB card can be formatted for up to 20 songs.

• An audio recording area of approximately 128MB is

reserved on the memory card for each song.

• The minimum number of audio recordings you can

specify is 0 (which specifies the card will not be used

for storage of audio recordings).

• The higher the number of audio recordings you specify

here, the longer it will take to format the card.

Press the R-14 (YES) button to format the

memory card or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

• The message “Please Wait” will remain on the display

while the format operation is being performed. Do not

perform any Digital Keyboard operation while this

message is on the display. “Complete” appears on the

display after formatting is complete.

• Formatting may take as long as a few minutes to

complete.

Insert the memory card into the card slot.

If the Digital Keyboard is in the card mode,

press the C-9 (CARD) button to exit the card

mode.

Depending on the type of data you want to save

to the memory card, perform one of the steps

shown below.

• All setup registration banks are saved as a batch. Other

data is saved in area (data item) units.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-9 (LOAD/SAVE) button.

• This causes an “Xxxx Load”*1 screen like the one

shown below to appear. The sample screen below

shows the screen that appears from the rhythm screen.

Saving Digital Keyboard Data to a

Memory Card

To save Digital Keyboard data to a memory

card

To save this

type of data: Do this:

One user rhythm 1. Press the L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS)

button.

2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to

specify the user rhythm number.

One user tone 1. Press the R-11 ([K] USER TONES)

button.

2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to

specify the user tone number.

One user

drawbar organ

tone

1. Press the R-12 ([L] DRAWBAR ORGAN)

button.

2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to

specify the user drawbar organ tone

number (L:051 through L:100).

One user DSP 1. Perform steps 1 through 4 under “To use

a DSP” (page E-32).

2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to

specify the user DSP number (101

through 200).

One user preset 1. While holding down the L-6 ([D] INDIAN)

button, press the L-7 ([E] PIANO

RHYTHMS) button to display the music

preset screen.

2. Press the L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS)

button.

3. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to

specify the user preset number.

One song

sequencer song

1. Press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER)

button to enter the song sequencer mode.

2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to

specify the song number.

All registration

banks

Press the C-10 (BANK) button to display the

registration bank selection screen.

CTK7300IN_e.book 138 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using a Memory Card

E-139

Press the R-17 (y) button to change to the

“Xxxx Save”*1 screen.

• To save a song sequencer song in SMF format, press

the R-17 (y) button one more time here to display the

“Seq SmfSave” screen. You can switch between the

“Xxxx Load”, “Seq Save”, and “Seq SmfSave” screens

using the R-17 (t, y) buttons.

Enter the file name to assign to the data when it

is stored.

Change the initial default file name “USERNAME.xxx”*2

as described below.

• The characters you can select are shown below.

After everything is the way you want, press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to save or

the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

• Performing the above procedure to write a song sequencer

song to an SMF format file will save the data as SMF

Format 0 (16 channel) data. System track data A01 through

A16 are saved respectively to SMF 01CH through 16CH,

while song tracks 01 through 16 are saved respectively to

SMF 01CH through 16CH. Note that the save operation

gives priority to the data of tracks 01 through 16. If there is

data in any of the tracks 01 through 16 and “on” is selected

for the “Part” (part on/off) setting of a track that contains

data, the system track data (A01 through A16) for the same

numbered track data will not be saved. Also, the note

events of tracks that are turned off using the mixer are not

saved.

Press the C-9 (CARD) button to enter the card

mode.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays the function menu “Play/CardUtl” screen.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“AllData” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

When the “All Load” screen appears, use the

R-17 (y) button to change to the “All Save”

screen.

• The remainder of the steps are the same as those from

step 6 under “To save Digital Keyboard data to a

memory card” (page E-138).

(1) Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the cursor to

the character you want to change.

(2) Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

character.

*1 The “Xxxx” part of the file name depends the type of

data you are saving.

*2 The “xxx” part of the file name is a file name extension

that depends the type of data you are saving.

}

{

)

(

To batch save all Digital Keyboard data to a

memory card

CTK7300IN_e.book 139 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using a Memory Card

E-140

■Memory card Data Storage

The above procedure stores Digital Keyboard data in a folder

named MUSICDAT on the memory card.

• The MUSICDAT folder is created automatically when you

format the memory card on the Digital Keyboard (page

E-137).

• Note that files not in the MUSICDAT folder cannot be

loaded, deleted, or renamed by this Digital Keyboard. You

also will not be able to load or delete any file stored in any

subfolder inside the MUSICDAT folder.

• Make sure that all of the data you want to load is in the

MUSICDAT folder on the memory card.

Insert the memory card into the card slot.

If the Digital Keyboard is in the card mode,

press the C-9 (CARD) button to exit the card

mode.

Referring to the table in step 3 of the procedure

under “To save Digital Keyboard data to a

memory card” (page E-138), perform the

procedure required for the type of data you

want to load from the card.

• All setup registration banks are loaded as a batch.

Other data is loaded in area (data item) units.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-9 (LOAD/SAVE) button.

• This causes an “Xxxx Load”* screen like the one shown

below to appear. The sample screen below shows the

screen that appears from the rhythm screen.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to display the

file you want to import.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to load or

the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

*The “Xxxx” part of the file name depends the type of data

on the memory card.

Press the C-9 (CARD) button to enter the card

mode.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays the function menu “Play/CardUtl” screen.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“AllData” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays the “All Load” screen.

• The remainder of the steps are the same as those from

step 5 under “To load data to Digital Keyboard memory

from a memory card” (page E-140).

Loading Data from a Memory

Card

To load data to Digital Keyboard memory

from a memory card

To batch load all Digital Keyboard memory

data from a memory card

CTK7300IN_e.book 140 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using a Memory Card

E-141

Insert the memory card into the card slot.

Press the C-9 (CARD) button to enter the card

mode.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays the function menu “Play/CardUtl” screen.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“FileDelete” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays a screen for specifying the file to be

deleted.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to display the

file you want to delete.

Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to delete

or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

• Pressing the R-14 (YES) button displays the message

“Please Wait” (indicating the operation is in progress).

Do not perform any operation while this message is on

the display. “Complete” appears on the display after the

operation is complete.

Insert the memory card into the card slot.

Press the C-9 (CARD) button to enter the card

mode.

While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)

button, press the C-17 (MENU) button.

• This displays the function menu “Play/CardUtl” screen.

Use the R-17 (i, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“FileRename” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This displays a screen for specifying the file to be

renamed.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to display the

file you want to rename.

Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the

cursor to the name character position you want

to change, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)

buttons to select the character you want.

After the name is the way you want, press the

R-16 (ENTER) button.

In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to rename

the file or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

• Pressing the R-14 (YES) button displays the message

“Please Wait” (indicating the operation is in progress).

Do not perform any operation while this message is on

the display. “Complete” appears on the display after the

operation is complete.

To delete a file from a memory

card

To rename a file on a memory

card

CTK7300IN_e.book 141 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using a Memory Card

E-142

You can use the Digital Keyboard to play music files you

saved to a memory card with your computer.

• Supported music files are SMF format 0 or 1 MIDI files

(MID).

• Playback of audio files (WAV, MP3, etc.) is not

supported.

• Data Manager computer software (page E-146) can be

used to convert WAV format files to a format that can

be played back by the Digital Keyboard. For details,

refer to the Data Manager user’s guide.

• At the same time playback starts, the transpose setting

(page E-18) will change to 00 and the local control setting

(page E-134) will change to “on”.

Format the memory card on the Digital

Keyboard (page E-137).

• This will cause a folder named MUSICDAT to be

automatically created in the memory card root

directory.

Use your computer to copy the music file you

want to play to the MUSICDAT folder that was

created in step 1.

• See the “Important!” note above for information about

supported file types.

Insert the memory card into the card slot.

Press the C-9 (CARD) button to enter the card

mode.

Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select the

music file you want to play.

To start playback, press the L-16 (PLAY/STOP)

button.

• To perform a fast forward operation, hold down the

L-14 (dFF) button. The measure number in the lower

right corner of the display scrolls at high speed while

the L-14 (dFF) is depressed. Releasing the button

immediately resumes normal playback from that point.

• To perform a fast backward operation, hold down the

L-13 (sREW) button. Sound is muted and the

measure number in the lower right corner of the display

scrolls at high speed while the L-13 (sREW) is

depressed. Releasing the button immediately resumes

normal playback from the beginning of the measure

whose number is displayed.

• Pressing the L-15 (PAUSE) button pauses playback.

Press again to resume playback.

To stop playback, press the L-16 (PLAY/STOP)

button.

C-9C-9

R-17R-17

R-16R-16

R-14R-14

L-8L-8L-7L-7

L-12L-12

L-15L-15

L-16L-16

L-17L-17

L-14L-14

L-13L-13

Playing a Music File from a

Memory Card

To play a music file from a memory card

CTK7300IN_e.book 142 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using a Memory Card

E-143

When playing a music file of a piano piece that has the left

hand and the right hand parts recorded in separate MIDI

channels, you can turn off playback of one of the parts and

play it on the keyboard along with playback of the other part.

Enter the card mode and select the MIDI file you

want to play.

Press the L-17 (PART SELECT) button.

• This displays a “Part Select” screen like the one shown

below, with the 0 next to “Part L”.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0

between “Part L” (left-hand part) and “Part R”

(right-hand part), and the dial or R-14 (–, +)

buttons to turn the currently selected part on or

off.

Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to

“SelectCh” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.

• This causes the screen shown below to appear.

Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0

between “Part L” (left-hand part) and “Part R”

(right-hand part), and the dial or R-14 (–, +)

buttons to specify the MIDI channel for

currently selected part.

Press the L-17 (PART SELECT) button to exit

the part on/off screen.

To start playback, press the L-16 (PLAY/STOP)

button.

• This starts playback of the part you turned on in step 3.

To stop playback, press the L-16 (PLAY/STOP)

button.

• The part on/off setting reverts to the initial default (both

parts on) whenever you select a different music file.

Turning Off One Hand Part and Playing the

Other Hand Part on the Keyboard (Part Off)

CTK7300IN_e.book 143 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Using a Memory Card

E-144

You can perform the following operations and play on the

keyboard along with playback of a music file on a memory

card.

• Select UPPER 1 part, UPPER 2 part, and LOWER part

tones.

• Specify layer, split on/off, and the split point

The procedures for performing these operations are the same

as those performed in the rhythm mode. For details about the

operation, see “Layering and Splitting Tones” (page E-15).

You also can use the procedure below to easily assign the

same tone as the right-hand part or left-hand part of the music

file to the keyboard (UPPER 1 part tone) for manual play.

■To assign the same tone as the right-hand part or

left-hand part of the music file to the keyboard

Perform the procedure under “Turning Off One

Hand Part and Playing the Other Hand Part on

the Keyboard (Part Off)” (page E-143) to turn off

the part you want to play on the keyboard.

• This step is not required if you want to play along on the

keyboard while playing back both hand parts.

While holding down the L-7 ([E] PIANO

RHYTHMS) button, press the L-8 ([F] USER

RHYTHMS) button.

• This assigns the tone of the part that is turned off to the

UPPER 1 part.

• If both parts are on or off, the right-hand part of the

music file is assigned to the UPPER 1 part.

This starts playback of the music file. Play the

part you want on the keyboard.

Enter the card mode and select the MIDI file you

want to play.

Press the L-16 (PLAY/STOP) button to start

playback.

When playback reaches the measure you want

to specify as the repeat start point, press the

L-12 (REPEAT) button.

• The ? indicator will be flashing on the display.

When playback reaches the measure you want

to specify as the repeat end point, press the

L-12 (REPEAT) button.

• The ? indicator will stop flashing and repeat

playback of the measures within the range you

specified in steps 3 and 4 will start.

• The repeat range is from the beginning of the measure

you specified in step 3 to the end of the measure you

specified in step 4.

• If you do not specify an end point, the end of the song

will be the end point.

To stop playback, press the L-16 (PLAY/STOP)

button.

• Pressing the L-16 (PLAY/STOP) button again will

restart repeat playback using the same start and end

points.

• The repeat range is cleared when you select a different

music file.

See “To change the tempo setting” (page E-19).

See “SongVol. (Song Volume)” (page E-133). For information

about how to configure settings, see “To change the setting of

a function menu item” (page E-130).

See “PreCount (Song Pre-count Sound)” (page E-133). For

information about how to configure settings, see “To change

the setting of a function menu item” (page E-130).

Playing on the Keyboard Along with

Playback of a Music File on a memory card

To repeat play a specific section of a song

To change the playback tempo

To adjust playback volume in accordance

with keyboard play volume

To sound a pre-count at the start of playback

CTK7300IN_e.book 144 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-145

Connecting to a Computer

You can connect the Digital Keyboard to a computer and

exchange MIDI data between them. You can send play data

from the Digital Keyboard to commercially available music

software running on your computer, or you can send MIDI

data from your computer to the Digital Keyboard for playback.

The following shows the minimum computer system

requirements for sending and receiving MIDI data. Check to

make sure that your computer complies with these

requirements before connecting the Digital Keyboard to it.

• Operating System

•USB port

• Never connect to a computer that does not conform to

the above requirements. Doing so can cause problems

with your computer.

• Make sure you follow the steps of the procedure below

exactly. Connecting incorrectly can make data send

and receive impossible.

Turn off the Digital Keyboard and then start up

your computer.

• Do not start up the music software on your computer

yet!

After starting up your computer, use a

commercially available USB cable to connect it

to the Digital Keyboard.

Turn on the Digital Keyboard.

• If this is the first time you are connecting the Digital

Keyboard to your computer, the driver software

required to send and receive data will be installed on

your computer automatically.

Start up commercially available music software

on your computer.

Configure the music software settings to select

one of the following as the MIDI device.

• For information about how to select the MIDI device,

see the user documentation that comes with the music

software you are using.

• Be sure to turn on the Digital Keyboard first before

starting up your computer’s music software.

• Once you are able to connect successfully for the first time,

there is no problem with leaving the USB cable connected

when you turn off your computer and/or Digital Keyboard.

• You can alter the Digital Keyboard’s MIDI setup by

changing the MIDI data send channel or other settings. For

details, see “MIDI Group” under “Function Menu Settings”

(page E-131).

• For information about the relationship between each Digital

Keyboard part (page E-36) and the MIDI IN and MIDI OUT

channels, see “Assigning a MIDI Channel to Each Part”

(page E-161).

• This Digital Keyboard conforms to General MIDI Level 1

(GM).

• For detailed specifications and connections that apply to

MIDI data send and receive by this Digital Keyboard, see

the latest support information provided by the website at the

following URL.

http://world.casio.com/

Minimum Computer System

Requirements

Windows® XP (SP2 or later) *1

Windows Vista® *2

Windows® 7 *3

Windows® 8 *4

Mac OS® X

(10.3.9, 10.4.11, 10.5.X, 10.6.X, 10.7.X, 10.8.X)

*1: Windows XP Home Edition

Windows XP Professional (32-bit)

*2: Windows Vista (32-bit)

*3: Windows 7 (32-bit, 64-bit)

*4: Windows 8 (32-bit, 64-bit)

Connecting the Digital Keyboard to Your

Computer

CASIO USB-MIDI : For Windows Vista, Windows 7,

Windows 8, Mac OS X

USB Audio Device : For Windows XP

Computer USB port

A connector

B connector

Digital Keyboard USB jack

USB cable

(A-B type)

CTK7300IN_e.book 145 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Connecting to a Computer

E-146

You can transfer song sequencer songs, user rhythms, and

other data in Digital Keyboard memory to a computer for

storage. You also can load Auto Accompaniment data you

download from the CASIO website to the Digital Keyboard,

which greatly expands the Auto Accompaniment patterns

available to you. A special Data Manager application is

required in order to transfer data to and from the Digital

Keyboard.

The same types of data that you can store to or recall from a

memory card (page E-136) can be transferred to and from the

Digital Keyboard.

Go to the CASIO WORLDWIDE site at the

following URL.

http://world.casio.com/

At the site, select a geographic area or country.

After accessing the area site, navigate to the

minimum computer system requirements for

Data Manager for this product.

• You should be able to find a link to Data Manager

information on the product introduction page of this

product. If you cannot find such a link, use the search

form of the area site where you are located to enter the

model name of this product and search for it.

• Note that site contents are subject to change without

notice.

Check if your computer system complies with

the minimum requirements for Data Manager.

Download Data Manager and its user’s guide to

your computer.

Follow the procedure in the user’s guide that

you downloaded in step 5 to install and use

Data Manager.

You can use the procedures in this section to import and use

rhythm data from another model.

• You may experience some abnormalities when trying to

play back rhythm data created for another model.

• Note that some of the models described below are

available only in certain geographic locations.

Storing and Loading Digital

Keyboard Memory Data

Data Types Supported for Data Transfer

Downloading Data Manager

To download Data Manager

Using Rhythm (Auto

Accompaniment) Data from

another Model

Rhythm Data Compatibility

1Models whose rhythm data is compatible with the

Digital Keyboard

Rhythm data (filename extension: ac7) of the models

below can be imported to the Digital Keyboard and used

as-is.

Conversely, rhythm data from this Digital Keyboard can be

used on these models.

AP-6/620/650M/658M

AT-3/5

CDP-200R/220R

CTK-4000/4200/5000/5000SK/5200/5300/6000/6200/

6250/6300/6300IN/7000/7200/7300/7300IN

PX-330/350M/358M

WK-200/210/220/225/330/500/6500/6600/7500/7600

2Models whose rhythm data can be used as-is on the

Digital Keyboard

Rhythm data (filename extensions: z00 and ckf) of the

models below can be imported to the Digital Keyboard and

used as-is. Rhythm data for these models can be

downloaded from the CASIO MUSIC SITE

(http://music.casio.com/).

CTK-671/691/900

PX-410R/575R

WK-3000/3200/3300/3500/3700/3800/8000

Rhythm data from this Digital Keyboard cannot be used on

these models.

3Models whose rhythm data can be used on the Digital

Keyboard following conversion

Rhythm data (filename extensions: cpt and ept) can be

imported to the Digital Keyboard and used after it is

converted with Rhythm Converter to compatible data

(described in 2 above). Rhythm Converter can be

downloaded from the CASIO MUSIC SITE

(http://music.casio.com/).

CTK-731/738/811

WK-1800

Rhythm data from this Digital Keyboard cannot be used on

these models.

CTK7300IN_e.book 146 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Connecting to a Computer

E-147

You can transfer rhythm data from other models by loading it

from a memory card, or by using Data Manager to transfer the

data from a computer to Digital Keyboard memory. For

information about actual operations, see “Importing Data from

Various Storage Media” (page E-147).

• Note that rhythm data from some models needs to be

converted before it can be used on this Digital Keyboard.

For more information, see “Rhythm Data Compatibility”

(page E-146).

The procedure you need to use to import or transfer rhythm

data to Digital Keyboard memory depends on the media

(computer local disk, memory card) where the data is

currently stored. This section explains each of the required

procedures.

• For details about Data Manager, see “Storing and Loading

Digital Keyboard Memory Data” (page E-146).

• For information about the types of memory cards supported

by the Digital Keyboard, see “Using a Memory Card” (page

E-136).

Perform one of the procedures below, depending on the type

of data you want to load.

Importing and Transferring Rhythm Data

from Other Models

Importing Data from Various

Storage Media

To load rhythm data into Digital Keyboard

memory

If the data is on

this type of

media:

Do this:

Computer local

disk

1. Perform the procedure under “To download

Data Manager” (page E-146).

• For details about how to transfer data from

the computer to the Digital Keyboard, see

the user documentation that comes with

Data Manager.

Or:

1. Copy the data from your computer’s local disk

to the MUSICDAT folder on a 2GB to 32GB

capacity memory card that has been formatted

on the Digital Keyboard.

2. Perform the procedure under “To load data to

Digital Keyboard memory from a memory card”

(page E-140).

2GB to 32GB

capacity memory

card

1. Depending on the location of the data on the

memory card, perform either of the following

operations.

• If the data is in the MUSICDAT folder on the

memory card, advance directly to step 2 of

this procedure.

• If the data is not in the MUSICDAT folder on

the memory card, move it to the MUSICDAT

folder. If there is no MUSICDAT folder on the

memory card, create a new folder in the

memory card’s root directory and name it

MUSICDAT. Next, move the data to the

folder.

2. Perform the procedure under “To load data to

Digital Keyboard memory from a memory card”

(page E-140).

Unsupported

memory card

(capacity less

than 2GB, etc.)

1. Copy the data on the memory card to the

computer’s local disk.

2. Copy the data in step 1 from the computer’s

local disk to the MUSICDAT folder of a memory

card (2GB to 32GB card) that was formatted on

the Digital Keyboard.

3. Perform the procedure under “To load data to

Digital Keyboard memory from a memory card”

(page E-140).

Or:

1. Copy the data on the memory card to the

computer’s local disk.

2. Perform the procedure under “To download

Data Manager” (page E-146).

• For details about how to transfer data from

the computer to the Digital Keyboard, see

the user documentation that comes with

Data Manager.

CTK7300IN_e.book 147 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

E-148

Reference

Error Messages

Display

Message Cause Required Action

Format 1. The current memory card format is not compatible

with this Digital Keyboard.

1. Format the memory card on the Digital Keyboard

(page E-137).

2. The memory card capacity is greater than 32GB. 2. Use a memory card with a capacity between 2GB

and 32GB.

3. You are trying to use an SDXC card. 3. SDXC cards not supported. Use an SD or SDHC

memory card.

4. There is something wrong with the memory card. 4. Use a different memory card.

Card Full There is not enough room available on the memory

card.

Delete some of the files on the memory card to make

room for new data (page E-141), or use a different

card.

Card R/W Memory card data is corrupted. Use a different memory card.

No Card 1. The memory card is not loaded correctly in the

Digital Keyboard’s card slot.

1. Correctly load the memory card into the card slot.

2. The memory card was removed while some

operation was in progress.

2. Do not remove the memory card while any

operation is in progress.

No Data 1. You tried to save a Digital Keyboard user area

(user rhythm, user rhythm song, etc.) that does not

contain any data to the memory card.

1. Select a user area that contains data.

2. You are attempting to play back an audio file that

does not contain any data.

2. Select an audio file whose number has an asterisk

(*) next to it, which indicates that it contains

recorded data.

No File 1. There is no MUSICDAT folder (page E-140) on the

memory card.

1. Create a MUSICDAT folder on the memory card or

format the memory card on the Digital Keyboard

(page E-137).

2. There is no loadable or playable data in the

MUSICDAT folder.

2. Move the file you want to load or play into the

memory card’s MUSICDAT folder.

Not SMF0/1 You are attempting to play back SMF Format 2 file. This Digital Keyboard supports playback of SMF

Format 0 or Format 1 only.

Protect The memory card is write-protected. Use the memory card’s write protect switch to enable

writing.

Read Only A read-only file with the same name you are trying to

use is already stored on the memory card.

• Use a different name to save the new file.

• Remove the read-only attribute from the existing

file and overwrite it with the new file.

• Use a different memory card.

Size Over 1. The data on the memory card is too big to play. 1. This Digital Keyboard supports playback of song

data files with a maximum size of about 320KB.

2. The data you are trying to load is too large. 2. The following is the approximate maximum data

sizes (per data item) when loading data into Digital

Keyboard memory.

User rhythm: 32KB

Song sequencer song: 159KB

User preset: 8KB

A total of approximately 128KB of user presets

(total of all 100 user presets) can be loaded.

Wrong Data 1. The memory card data is corrupted. Use a different memory card.

2. The memory card contains data that is not

supported by this Digital Keyboard.

CTK7300IN_e.book 148 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Reference

E-149

Meas. Limit You tried to perform an operation during song

sequencer song editing or user music preset editing

that would cause the number of measures in the song

or chord progression to exceed 999.

Make sure your edits do not cause the number of

measures to exceed the 999-measure limit.

Memory Full 1. There is not enough memory capacity required for

pattern sequencer operations.

1. To record new data of some part of some

accompaniment pattern, clear another part and/or

another accompaniment patterns. If you want to

use Easy Edit, select a different rhythm from the

one that was selected when the error message

appeared.

2. Remaining memory capacity became too low

during music preset editing.

2. Referring to “To clear user preset data” (page

E-59), delete user presets you no longer need in

order to free up memory.

3. There is not enough memory capacity required for

song sequencer operations.

3. Delete other tracks and/or songs to free up memory

space.

File Name When renaming a file on a memory card, attempting

to specify a file name that is already used.

Use a different name.

Card Size Memory card capacity is not enough for audio

recording and playback.

Use a memory card with a capacity at least 2GB.

Write Error! Writing to internal storage memory failed. Try again.

Display

Message Cause Required Action

CTK7300IN_e.book 149 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Reference

E-150

Troubleshooting

Symptom Action

Included Accessories

I can’t find something that should be

included with the product.

Carefully check inside all of the packing materials.

Power Requirements

Power will not turn on. • Check the AC adaptor or make sure that the batteries are facing correctly (page

E-9).

• Replace the batteries with new ones or switch over to AC adaptor power (page

E-9).

• You may have tried to perform some operation while the “Please Wait” message

was displayed, which caused an internal problem. If other measures do not

correct this problem, perform the operation below to turn on power.

Warning!

The following operation will delete all Digital Keyboard data and return all

settings to their initial factory defaults.

While holding down the R-2 ([B] E.PIANO) and R-5 ([E] STRINGS) buttons,

press the L-1 (P) button to turn on power.

The display lights up momentarily but

power does not turn on when I press the

L-1 (P) button.

Press the L-1 (P) button firmly and completely to turn on power.

The Digital Keyboard outputs a loud sound

and then suddenly powers down.

Replace the batteries with new ones or switch over to AC adaptor power (page

E-9).

The Digital Keyboard suddenly powers

down after a few minutes.

This happens when Auto Power Off (page E-13) is triggered.

Display

The display keeps going out or is flashing. Replace the batteries with new ones or switch over to AC adaptor power (page

E-9).

Screen contents are visible only from

straight ahead.

This is due to production limitations. It does not indicate malfunction.

Sound

Nothing happens when I press any

keyboard key.

• Adjust the volume setting (page E-13).

• Check if something is plugged into the T-9 (PHONES) jack on the back of the

Digital Keyboard.

• Turn power off and then back on to initialize all keyboard settings (page E-13).

Nothing happens or notes do not play

normally when I play on the left side of the

keyboard.

Press the L-17 (ACCOMP ON/OFF) button to disable chord input with chord

keyboard (page E-24).

Nothing happens when I start an Auto

Accompaniment.

• With rhythms E:030 to E:039, nothing will sound until you play a chord on the

keyboard. Try playing a chord (page E-26).

• Check and adjust the accompaniment volume setting (page E-133).

• If there is no user rhythm stored in memory, Auto Accompaniment will not start

when you press the L-16 (START/STOP) button while a rhythm in the range of

F:001 to F:100 is selected (page E-24).

• Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard settings (page

E-13).

The metronome does not sound. • Check and adjust the metronome volume setting (page E-133).

• Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard settings (page

E-13).

CTK7300IN_e.book 150 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Reference

E-151

Notes keep sounding, without stopping. • Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard settings (page

E-13).

• Replace the batteries with new ones or switch over to AC adaptor power (page

E-9).

Some notes are cut off while they are

playing.

Notes are cut off whenever the number of notes being sounded exceeds the

maximum polyphony value of 64 (21 to 32 for some tones). This does not indicate

malfunction.

The volume or tone setting I configured

has changed.

• Adjust the volume setting (page E-13).

• Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard settings (page

E-13).

• Replace the batteries with new ones or switch over to AC adaptor power (page

E-9).

Output volume does not change even

though I change my keyboard pressure.

• Change the Touch Response setting (page E-132).

• Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard settings (page

E-13).

In certain keyboard ranges, the volume

and tone quality sound are slightly

different from those in other keyboard

ranges.

This is due to system limitations. It does not indicate malfunction.

With some tones, octaves do not change

at the far ends of the keyboard.

This is due to system limitations. It does not indicate malfunction.

The pitch of the notes does not match

other accompanying instruments or

sounds strange when played along with

other instruments.

• When the B indicator is displayed, it means that the transpose setting

(page E-18) has been used to change the pitch of the keyboard. Return the

transpose setting to 00.

• When the C indicator is displayed, it means that the scale setting (page

E-21) has been used to change the Digital Keyboard’s initial default setting. Use

the procedure under “To select a preset scale” (page E-21) to change to the

“Equal” preset scale.

• Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard settings (page

E-13).

The reverb of notes seems to change

suddenly.

• Check and adjust the reverb setting (page E-31).

• Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard settings (page

E-13).

Operation

Tone, rhythm, and other settings revert to

their initial defaults whenever you turn on

the Digital Keyboard.

The Digital Keyboard may be configured to restore default settings (factory default

settings or settings registered by you) when power is turned on. If you want the

Digital Keyboard to remember its last setup and restore it the next time it is turned

on, select “on” for the Auto Resume setting (page E-134).

Computer Connection

I can’t exchange data between the Digital

Keyboard and a computer.

• Check to make sure that the USB cable is connected to the Digital Keyboard and

computer, and that the device is selected correctly with your computer’s music

software settings (page E-145).

• Turn off the Digital Keyboard and then exit the music software on your computer.

Next, turn the Digital Keyboard back on and then restart the music software on

your computer.

Symptom Action

CTK7300IN_e.book 151 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Reference

E-152

Specifications

Models CTK-7300IN

Keyboard 61 standard-size keys

Touch Response 2 types, Off

Maximum Polyphony 64 notes (32 for certain tones, 21 for drawbar organ tones)

Tones

Built-in Tones 820

User Tones Up to 100 (Tone Editor), up to 50 (Drawbar Edit)

Functions Layer, Split

Drawbar Organ

Drawbars 9 sliders (16', 5 1/3', 8', 4', 2 2/3', 2', 1 3/5', 1 1/3', 1')

Percussion Second/Third

Click On/Off

Rotary Effect Fast/Slow

Reverb 1 to 10, Off

Chorus 1 to 5

DSP

Preset DSP 100

User DSP Up to 100

Metronome

Beats per Measure 0, 2 to 6

Tempo Range 30 to 255

Auto Accompaniment

Built-in Rhythms 275

User Rhythms Up to 100 (Pattern Sequencer)

Demo Songs 5 songs

Registration 96 (6 setups × 16 banks)

Song Sequencer Real-time recording, playback

Punch-in recording

Keyboard Play 5 songs, 17 tracks

Memory Capacity Approximately 30,000 notes (total for 5 songs)

Audio Recording and Playback

Functions

Requirement An SD or SDHC memory card, 2GB to 32GB

Recording Recording of keyboard play, song sequencer song playback, sound input from MIC IN jack

and INST IN jack

Up to 20 audio files (maximum recording time: approximately 13 minutes for a single audio

file)

Playback Up to 999 files (including files used for recording)

Mixer 32 parts (A01-A16/B01-B16)

Master parameters, DSP parameters, Part parameters, MIC/INST parameters

Other Functions

Transpose ±1 octaves (–12 to +12 semitones)

Octave Shift UPPER 1/UPPER 2/LOWER ±2 octaves

Tuning A4 = 415.5 - 440.0 - 465.9 Hz

Scale Tuning Scale Fine Tune, Preset Scales

Music Preset 305 built-in, plus 100 user presets

One Touch Preset 275

Auto Harmonize 12 types

Arpeggiator 150 types

Equalizer 10 presets

CTK7300IN_e.book 152 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Reference

E-153

• Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

MIDI 16 multi-timbre received, GM Level 1 standard

Pitch Bend Wheel

Pitch Bend Range 0 to 24 semitones

Memory Cards

Supported Memory Cards SD or SDHC memory cards, 2GB to 32GB

Functions SMF playback, file storage, file recall, file delete, card format

Inputs/Outputs

USB jack TYPE B

Sustain/Assignable jack Standard jack (sustain, sostenuto, soft, start/stop)

Phones jack Stereo standard jack

Line Out R, L/MONO jacks Standard jack × 2

Output Impedance: 2.3kΩ, Output Voltage: 1.5V (RMS) MAX

Audio In jack Stereo mini jack

Input Impedance: 9kΩ, Input Sensitivity: 200mV

Inst In Jack Standard jack

Input Impedance: 9kΩ, Input Sensitivity: 200mV

Mic In jack Standard jack (connect a dynamic microphone only)

Input Impedance: 3kΩ, Input Sensitivity: 10mV

Power Jack 12V DC

Power Supply 2-way

Batteries 6 D-size zinc-carbon batteries or alkaline batteries

Battery Life Approximately 4 hours continuous operation on alkaline batteries

AC Adaptor AD-A12150LW

• The AC adaptor can be used safely in areas up to 4,000 meters above sea level.

Auto Power Off Approximately 6 minutes after last key operation during battery use,

approximately 4 hours after last key operation during AC adaptor use. Auto Power Off can be

disabled.

Speakers 12 cm × 2 + 3 cm × 2 (Output: 7.0W + 7.0W)

Power Consumption 12V = 18W

Dimensions 94.8 × 38.4 × 12.2 cm (37 3/8 × 15 1/8 × 4 13/16 inch)

Weight Approximately 6.7kg (14.8 lbs) (without batteries)

CTK7300IN_e.book 153 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Reference

E-154

Be sure to read and observe the following operating

precautions.

■Location

Avoid the following locations for this product.

• Areas exposed to direct sunlight and high humidity

• Areas subjected to temperature extremes

• Near a radio, TV, video deck, or tuner

The above devices will not cause malfunction of the

product, but the product can cause interference in the audio

or video of a nearby device.

■User Maintenance

• Never use benzine, alcohol, thinner, or other chemical

agents to clean the product.

• To clean the product or its keyboard, wipe with a soft cloth

moistened in a weak solution of water and a mild neutral

detergent. Wring all excess moisture from the cloth before

wiping.

■Included and Optional Accessories

Use only accessories that are specified for use with this

product. Use of unauthorized accessories creates the risk of

fire, electric shock, and personal injury.

■AC Adaptor Handling Precautions

• Use a power outlet that is easily accessible so you can

unplug the AC adaptor when a malfunction occurs or

whenever else you need to do so.

• The AC adaptor is intended for indoor use only. Do not use

it where it might be exposed to splashing or moisture. Do

not place any container, such as a flower vase, that

contains liquid on the AC adaptor.

• Store the AC adaptor in a dry place.

• Use the AC adaptor in an open, well-ventilated area.

• Never cover the AC adaptor with newspaper, a table cloth,

a curtain, or any other similar item.

• Unplug the AC adaptor from the power outlet if you do not

plan to use the product for a long time.

• Never try to repair the AC adaptor or modify it in any way.

• AC adaptor operating environment

Temperature: 0 to 40°C

Humidity: 10% to 90% RH

• Output polarity: &

■Weld Lines

Lines may be visible on the exterior of the product. These are

“weld lines” that result from the plastic molding process. They

are not cracks or scratches.

■Musical Instrument Etiquette

Always be aware of others around you whenever using this

product. Be especially careful when playing late at night to

keep the volume at levels that do not disturb others. Other

steps you can take when playing late at night are closing

windows and using headphones.

Operating Precautions

CTK7300IN_e.book 154 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Reference

E-155

The table below shows the preset DSPs that can be selected by the procedure under “To use a DSP” (page E-32).

• The “Number” column shows DSP numbers, while the “Screen Name” shows the DSP name that appears on the display.

• The DSPs of this Digital Keyboard consist of the 46 “types” shown in the “DSP Type List” (page E-156). A preset DSP is a

variation that is derived from one of these 46 types.

DSP Effect List

Preset DSP List

Number Screen Name Type Number

001 Comp 1 02

002 Comp 2 02

003 Enhance1 04

004 Enhance2 04

005 Phaser 1 07

006 Phaser 2 07

007 Phaser 3 07

008 Chorus 1 09

009 Chorus 2 09

010 Chorus 3 09

011 Chorus 4 09

012 Chorus 5 09

013 CmpCho 1 24

014 CmpCho 2 24

015 RefCho 41

016 Flanger1 08

017 Flanger2 08

018 Flanger3 08

019 Flanger4 08

020 CmpFln 25

021 Delay 1 10

022 Delay 2 10

023 Delay 3 10

024 Delay 4 10

025 Delay 5 10

026 Reflect1 11

027 Reflect2 11

028 Reflect3 11

029 CmpRef 26

030 ChoRef 1 36

031 ChoRef 2 36

032 ChoRef 3 36

033 FlnRef 1 38

034 FlnRef 2 38

035 FlnRef 3 38

036 Tremolo 6

037 CmpTrm 27

038 TrmRef 46

039 TrmCho 1 44

040 TrmCho 2 44

041 TrmFln 1 45

042 TrmFln 2 45

043 TrmDst 1 43

044 TrmDst 2 43

045 AutoPan 05

046 CmpPan 28

047 ChoPan 1 37

048 ChoPan 2 37

049 FlnPan 1 39

050 FlnPan 2 39

051 RefPan 1 42

052 RefPan 2 42

053 Rotary 1 12

054 Rotary 2 12

055 Rotary 3 12

056 Rotary 4 12

057 Rotary 5 12

058 Wah 1 01

059 Wah 2 01

060 Wah 3 01

061 Wah 4 01

062 CmpWah 22

063 WahCho 1 17

064 WahCho 2 17

065 WahFln 1 18

066 WahFln 2 18

067 WahDst 1 16

068 WahDst 2 16

069 WahTrm 1 20

070 WahTrm 2 20

071 WahPan 1 21

072 WahPan 2 21

073 WahRef 1 19

074 WahRef 2 19

075 WahCmp 1 15

076 WahCmp 2 15

077 Dist 1 03

078 Dist 2 03

079 Dist 3 03

080 DstCmp 30

081 CmpDst 23

082 DstTrm 1 34

083 DstTrm 2 34

084 DstPan 1 35

085 DstPan 2 35

086 DstCho 1 31

087 DstCho 2 31

088 DstFln 1 32

089 DstFln 2 32

090 DstFln 3 32

091 DstWah 1 29

092 DstWah 2 29

093 DstWah 3 29

094 DstWah 4 29

095 DstRef 33

096 RefDst 40

097 Lo-Fi 14

098 RingMod1 13

099 RingMod2 13

100 RingMod3 13

Number Screen Name Type Number

CTK7300IN_e.book 155 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Reference

E-156

All of the Digital Keyboard’s preset DSPs belong to one of the DSP types shown in the table below. When creating a user DSP

(page E-33) or when using the tone editor (page E-44) to edit the DSP applied to a tone, you need to select one of the DSP types

in the table.

• Type numbers 01 through 14 are single type DSPs, while numbers 15 through 46 are dual type DSPs. A single type DSP is one

with a single structure, while a dual type is a combination of two single type DSPs.

• The name of a dual DSP is formed by its two constituent single DSP names, in the order that they are applied. For example, type

15 named “Wah-Compressor” connects in line to “Wah” and “Compressor”, in that sequence.

• For details about parameters that can be configured with each DSP type, refer to the sections shown in the table below.

DSP Type List

For information about this DSP type: Go here:

Single type (Type numbers 01 through 14) Single Type DSP Parameters (page E-157)

Dual type (Type numbers 15 through 46) Dual Type DSP Parameters (page E-159)

Type Number DSP Type Name Screen Name

01 Wah Wah

02 Compressor Comp

03 Distortion Dist

04 Enhancer Enhance

05 AutoPan AutoPan

06 Tremolo Tremolo

07 Phaser Phaser

08 Flanger Flanger

09 Chorus Chorus

10 Delay Delay

11 Reflection Reflect

12 Rotary Rotary

13 RingModulator RingMod

14 Lo-Fi Lo-Fi

15 Wah-Compressor WahCmp

16 Wah-Distortion WahDst

17 Wah-Chorus WahCho

18 Wah-Flanger WahFln

19 Wah-Reflection WahRef

20 Wah-Tremolo WahTrm

21 Wah-AutoPan WahPan

22 Compressor-Wah CmpWah

23 Compressor-Distortion CmpDst

24 Compressor-Chorus CmpCho

25 Compressor-Flanger CmpFln

26 Compressor-Reflection CmpRef

27 Compressor-Tremolo CmpTrm

28 Compressor-AutoPan CmpPan

29 Distortion-Wah DstWah

30 Distortion-Compressor DstCmp

31 Distortion-Chorus DstCho

32 Distortion-Flanger DstFln

33 Distortion-Reflection DstRef

34 Distortion-Tremolo DstTrm

35 Distortion-AutoPan DstPan

36 Chorus-Reflection ChoRef

37 Chorus-AutoPan ChoPan

38 Flanger-Reflection FlnRef

39 Flanger-AutoPan FlnPan

40 Reflection-Distortion RefDst

41 Reflection-Chorus RefCho

42 Reflection-AutoPan RefPan

43 Tremolo-Distortion TrmDst

44 Tremolo-Chorus TrmCho

45 Tremolo-Flanger TrmFln

46 Tremolo-Reflection TrmRef

Type Number DSP Type Name Screen Name

CTK7300IN_e.book 156 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Reference

E-157

■Single Type DSP Parameters

01: Wah

This is a “wah” effect that can automatically affect the

frequency using an LFO.

Parameters and Value Ranges:

1 :Resonance (0 to 127)

Adjusts the strength of resonance.

2 :Manual (0 to 127)

Adjusts the wah filter reference frequency.

3 :LFO Rate (0 to 127)

Adjusts the LFO rate.

4 :LFO Depth (0 to 127)

Adjusts the LFO depth.

5 :LFO Waveform (off, sin, tri, random)

Selects the LFO waveform.

02: Compressor

Compresses the input signal, which can have the effect of

suppressing level variation and make it possible to sustain

dampened sounds longer.

Parameters and Value Ranges:

1 :Attack (0 to 127)

Adjusts the attack amount of the input signal. A smaller

value causes prompt compressor operation, which

suppresses the attack of the input signal. A larger values

delays compressor operation, which causes the attack of

the input signal to be output as-is.

2 :Release (0 to 127)

Adjusts the time from the point the input signal drops

below a certain level until the compression operation is

stopped. When an attack feeling is desired (no

compression at the onset of sound), set this parameter to

as low a value as possible. To have compression applied

at all times, set a high value.

3 :Level (0 to 127)

Adjusts the output level.

4 :Threshold (0 to 127)

Adjusts the volume level at which the compression

operation starts.

03: Distortion

Digital distortion that applies an overtone to the input signal

and distorts it.

Parameters and Value Ranges:

1 :Gain (0 to 127)

Adjusts the input signal gain.

2 :Level (0 to 127)

Adjusts the output level.

04: Enhancer

Phase shifts low-range sounds and high-range sounds of the

input signal to enhance the signal’s profile.

Parameters and Value Ranges:

1 :Low Frequency (0 to 127)

Adjusts the low range enhancer frequency.

2 :Low Phase (0 to 127)

Adjusts the phase shift amount of the low-range enhancer.

3 :High Frequency (0 to 127)

Adjusts the high range enhancer frequency.

4 :High Phase (0 to 127)

Adjusts the phase shift amount of the high-range

enhancer.

05: Auto Pan

Performs continual left-right panning of the input signal using

an LFO.

Parameters and Value Ranges:

1 :LFO Rate (0 to 127)

Adjusts the panning rate.

2 :LFO Depth (0 to 127)

Adjusts the panning depth.

3 :LFO Waveform (sin, tri)

Selects the LFO waveform.

06: Tremolo

Adjusts the volume of the input signal using an LFO.

Parameters and Value Ranges:

1 :LFO Rate (0 to 127)

Adjusts the tremolo rate.

2 :LFO Depth (0 to 127)

Adjusts the tremolo depth.

3 :LFO Waveform (sin, tri)

Selects the LFO waveform.

07: Phaser

Produces a distinctive pulsating, broad sound by using an

LFO to change the phase of the input signal and then mixes it

with the original input signal.

Parameters and Value Ranges:

1 :Resonance (0 to 127)

Adjusts the strength of the resonance.

2 :LFO Rate (0 to 127)

Adjusts the LFO rate.

3 :LFO Depth (0 to 127)

Adjusts the LFO depth.

4 :LFO Waveform (sin, tri, random)

Selects the LFO waveform.

DSP Parameter List

CTK7300IN_e.book 157 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Reference

E-158

08: Flanger

Applies wildly pulsating and metallic reverberation to sounds.

LFO waveform is selectable.

Parameters and Value Ranges:

1 :LFO Rate (0 to 127)

Adjusts the LFO rate.

2 :LFO Depth (0 to 127)

Adjusts the LFO depth.

3 :LFO Waveform (sin, tri, random)

Selects the LFO waveform.

4 :Feedback (0 to 127)

Adjusts the strength of feedback.

09: Chorus

Gives sounds depth and breadth. Chorus type is selectable.

Parameters and Value Ranges:

1 :LFO Rate (0 to 127)

Adjusts the LFO rate.

2 :LFO Depth (0 to 127)

Adjusts the LFO depth.

3 :LFO Waveform (sin, tri)

Selects the LFO waveform.

4 :Feedback (0 to 127)

Adjusts the strength of feedback

5 :Type (mono, stereo, tri)

Selects the chorus type.

10: Delay

Delays the input signal and feeds it back to create a repeating

effect and give sounds more breadth.

Parameters and Value Ranges:

1 :Delay Time (0 to 127)

Adjusts the delay time.

2 :Feedback (0 to 127)

Adjusts the repeat of the delay.

3 :Ratio Lch (0 to 127)

Adjusts the delay time of the left channel. This value is a

ratio of the value specified for Delay Time.

4 :Ratio Rch (0 to 127)

Adjusts the delay time of the right channel. This value is a

ratio of the value specified for Delay Time.

5 :Wet Level (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

Adjusts the level of the delay sound.

6 :Type (1, 2)

Selects the delay type.

Important!

When adjusting the delay time and type, certain settings can

result in a switching sound in the delay.

11: Reflection

An effector that extracts early reflections from reverb. Applies

acoustic presence to sounds.

Parameters and Value Ranges:

1 :Type (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8)

Selects from among the eight available reflection patterns.

2 :Feedback (0 to 127)

Adjusts the repeat of the reflected sound.

12: Rotary

This is a rotary speaker simulator.

Parameters and Value Ranges:

1 :Overdrive Gain (0, 1, 2, 3)

Adjusts overdrive gain.

2 :Overdrive Level (0 to 127)

Adjusts the overdrive output level.

3 :Speed (Slow, Fast)

Switches the speed mode between fast and slow.

4 :Brake (Rotate, Stop)

Stops speaker rotation.

5 :Fall Acceleration (0 to 127)

Adjusts acceleration when the speed mode is switched

from fast to slow.

6 :Rise Acceleration (0 to 127)

Adjusts acceleration when the speed mode is switched

from slow to fast.

7 :Slow Rate (0 to 127)

Adjusts the speaker rotation speed in the slow speed

mode.

8 :Fast Rate (0 to 127)

Adjusts the speaker rotation speed in the fast speed

mode.

13: Ring Modulator

Multiplies the input signal with an internal oscillator signal to

create a metallic sound.

Parameters and Value Ranges:

1 :OSC Frequency (0 to 127)

Sets the reference frequency of the internal oscillator.

2 :LFO Rate (0 to 127)

Adjusts the LFO rate.

3 :LFO Depth (0 to 127)

Adjusts the LFO depth.

4 :Type (1, 2, 3)

1 :Delay repeat determined by Delay Time.

2 :Delay repeat determined by Delay Time and Ratio L/R.

1 :Outputs the ring modulated signal only.

2 :Outputs the ring modulated signal and the input signal.

3 :Outputs a signal with a chorus effect applied to 2 (ring

modulated signal and input signal).

CTK7300IN_e.book 158 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Reference

E-159

14: Lo-Fi

Applies various types of noise to the input signal to reproduce

a retro Lo-Fi sound.

Includes wow and flutter for rotational fluctuation like that in

tapes and records, a Noise 1 generator that generates

continual FM radio type, and a Noise 2 generator that

generates record play types scratch noise.

Parameters and Value Ranges:

1 :Wow and Flutter Rate (0 to 127)

Adjusts the wow and flutter rate.

2 :Wow and Flutter Depth (0 to 127)

Adjusts the wow and flutter depth.

3 :Noise1 Level (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

Adjusts the level of Noise Generator 1.

4 :Noise2 Level (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

Adjusts the level of Noise Generator 2.

5 :Noise2 Density (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

Adjusts the frequency of Noise Generator 2.

6 :Bit (0, 1, 2, 3)

Distorts the sound. A larger number produces greater

distortion.

Important!

Raising the noise level while a note is not sounding will cause

noise to sound, even if there is no input signal.

■Dual Type DSP Parameters

Dual type DSPs are configured by combining two different

single type DSPs. Use the procedure below to determine what

parameters that can be configured for each dual type DSP,

and the operation, and setting ranges of dual type DSPs.

Example: Type number 29: Distortion-Wah

1. The DSP type name has two parts: a left side part and a

right side part.

Distortion-Wah 3 “Distortion” and “Wah”

2. Find out what parameters you can configure by looking up

the left side part of a dual type DSP in the “Type Name”

column of the table below.

3. Find the same type names in the table under “Single Type

DSP Parameters” on pages E-157 through E-159, and note

the operation and setting ranges of the items that are the

same as those shown in the “Configurable Parameters”

column of the above table.

4. Next, repeat steps 2 and 3 above for the right side part of

the dual type DSP parameter name.

Type Name Configurable Parameters

Wah LFO Waveform

LFO Rate

LFO Depth

Distortion Gain

Level

Chorus LFO Waveform

LFO Rate

LFO Depth

Flanger LFO Waveform

LFO Rate

LFO Depth

Reflection Feedback

Compressor Threshold

Level

Auto Pan LFO Waveform

LFO Rate

LFO Depth

Tremolo LFO Waveform

LFO Rate

LFO Depth

• In our “Distortion-Wah” example, the left side part of the

name is “Distortion” so we can see in the above table

that “Gain” and “Level” parameters can be configured.

You can find out about the operations and setting ranges

of “Gain” and “Level” by referring to “03: Distortion” on

page E-157.

• The parameter numbers that appear on the parameter

setting screen start from 1, and the number is

incremented for each successive parameter.

The parameter numbers of our “Distortion-Wah” example

would be as shown below.

1:Gain

2 :Level

3:LFO Waveform

4:LFO Rate

5 :LFO Depth

CTK7300IN_e.book 159 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Reference

E-160

In addition to the chords that can be fingered with Fingered 1

and Fingered 2, the following chords also are recognized.

• With Fingered 3, the lowest note fingered is interpreted as

the base note. Inverted forms are not supported.

• With Full Range Chord, when the lowest note fingered is a

certain distance from the neighboring note, the chord is

interpreted as a fraction chord.

• Unlike Fingered 1, 2, and 3, Full Range Chord requires

pressing of at least three keys to form a chord.

Fingering Guide

Fingered 1, Fingered 2 Chords

*1 With Fingered 2, interpreted as Am7.

*2 With Fingered 2, interpreted as Am7b5.

*3 Inverted form not supported in some cases.

Cdim

Caug *3

Csus4 *3

Csus2 *3

Cmadd9

CmM7

Cdim7 *3

C69 *3

C6 *1 *3

Cm6 *2 *3

Cm7 *3

CM7

Cm7b5 *3

C7sus4

Cadd9

C7b5 *3

Fingered 3, Full Range Chords

Supported Input Characters

Ddim

Fm7

Gm7

add9

    

     

CTK7300IN_e.book 160 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Reference

E-161

The following shows the relationship between MIDI IN and MIDI OUT channels and each part.

*The A01 part MIDI OUT channel depends on the keyboard channel setting. For details, see “KeyboardCh (Keyboard Channel)”

(page E-134).

• For details about parts, see “How Parts are Organized” (page E-36).

Assigning a MIDI Channel to Each Part

This

part:

MIDI Channel Part name

IN OUT

A01 -- 01*Upper1

A02 -- 02 Upper2

A03 -- 03 Lower

A04 -- 04 Harmo.

A05 -- 05 System Upper1

A06 -- 06 System Upper2

A07 -- 07 System Lower

A08 -- -- Metronome

A09 -- 09 Perc.

A10 -- 10 Drum

A11 -- 11 Bass

A12 -- 12 Chord1

A13 -- 13 Chord2

A14 -- 14 Chord3

A15 -- 15 Chord4

A16 -- 16 Chord5

This

part:

MIDI Channel Part name

IN OUT

B01 01 01

SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 01

B02 02 02

SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 02

B03 03 03

SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 03

B04 04 04

SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 04

B05 05 05

SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 05

B06 06 06

SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 06

B07 07 07

SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 07

B08 08 08

SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 08

B09 09 09

SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 09

B10 10 10

SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 10

B11 11 11

SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 11

B12 12 12

SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 12

B13 13 13

SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 13

B14 14 14

SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 14

B15 15 15

SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 15

B16 16 16

SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 16

CTK7300IN_e.book 161 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Reference

E-162

Parameter List

To check this setting item: Refer to this column in

the table below:

Setting items that are always saved when power is turned off 1

Setting items stored in registration memory (page E-66) 2

When “on” is selected for the “AutoResume (Auto Resume)” setting (page E-134), setting items

that are restored to those in effect the last time power was turned off 3

Items that are stored as “Default (Default Settings)” (page E-134)

Settings items initialized by the “To initialize all mixer parameters” operation (page E-40) 4

Setting items initialized when “Parameter” (parameter settings only) is selected by “Initialize

(Initialize)” (page E-135) 5

Setting Item 12345

User Memory Items

User rhythms, user tones, user drawbar

organ tones, user DSPs, user presets O

Registration O

Function Menu Item

Tuning OO

Equalizer O O

Touch Response OO O

Touch Off Velocity O O O

Pedal Assign OO O

Bend Range*1O O

Arpeggiator Hold OO O

Arpeggiator Speed O O O

Arpeggiator Part OO O

Registration Filter

(Accompaniment/Scale) O

Song Pre-count Sound OO

Song Repeat Play O O

Auto Accompaniment Volume O*2OO

Song Volume O O

Metronome Volume OOO

Audio Volume O O

Keyboard Channel OO

Local Control O

Accompaniment MIDI Out O

Speaker ON/OFF O O

LCD Contrast O

Auto Power Off O O

Auto Resume O

Other Items

Tone Number*1OOOO

Rhythm Number O*2O O

Music Preset Number O

Transpose O O O

Split On/Off OO O

Split Point O O O

Layer On/Off OO O

Octave Shift*3O O O

Accompaniment On/Off O*2OO

Chord Fingering Mode O*2O O

Auto Harmonize On/Off/Type OO O

Metronome Beat O O

DSP Disable O

Reverb (On, Off, Type) O O O

Chorus Type OO O

DSP Type O O O

Tempo O*2OO

Synchro Standby O*2O O

Scale Preset Number OO

Scale Root O O

Scale Fine Tuning O*4OO

Accompaniment Scale O*4O O O

Accompaniment Part On/Off O*2O

Mode (Rhythm/Card) Selection Status O

Card Song number O

Left-hand Part Select O

Right-hand Part Select O

Registration Bank Number O O

Rhythm Category Number OO

Tone Category Number O O

Music Preset Category Number O

Mixer Settings for Part A01 through A04

Part On/Off*1OOO

Part Volume*1O O O O

Part Pan*1OOOO

Part Coarse Tuning*1O O O O

Part Fine Tuning*1OOOO

Part Bend Range*1O O O O

Part DSP Line On/Off*1OOOO

Part Reverb Send*1O O O O

Part Chorus Send*1OOOO

Part Scale Enable*1O O O

Mixer Settings for Master, DSP and

EXT(M/I), and for Parts A05 through A16,

and Parts B01 through B16

*1 Configured for each of the following parts: A01 through

A04 (UPPER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER, Auto Harmonize).

*2 Not recalled when “on” is selected for “RegFltAcmp” (page

E-133).

*3 Configured for each of the following parts: A01 through

A03 (UPPER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER).

*4 Not recalled when “on” is selected for “RegFltScal” (page

E-133).

Setting Item 12345

CTK7300IN_e.book 162 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Reference

E-163

Chord Example List

Root

Chord

Type

dim

aug

sus4

sus2

m7b5

7b5

7sus4

add9

madd9

mM7

dim7

(A#)/BbBF#/(Gb)G(G#)/AbAFCC

#/(Db)D(D#)/EbE

• Since the chord input range is limited, this model may not support some of the chords shown above.

CTK7300IN_e.book 163 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Button Number Reference

CTK-7300IN

L-1L-1

L-12L-12 R-18R-18

R-15R-15 R-16R-16

R-19R-19

R-17R-17R-14R-14R-13R-13

R-20R-20L-13L-13 L-14L-14 L-15L-15 L-16L-16

D-2D-2D-1D-1 D-3D-3 D-4D-4 D-5D-5 D-6D-6 D-7D-7 D-8D-8D-9D-9 D-10D-10 D-11D-11 D-12D-12

L-17L-17

C-11C-11C-10C-10 C-12C-12 C-13C-13 C-14C-14 C-15C-15 C-16C-16 C-17C-17

L-3L-3 R-1R-1 R-2R-2 R-3R-3 R-4R-4 R-5R-5 R-6R-6

R-7R-7 R-8R-8R-9R-9

R-10R-10 R-11R-11 R-12R-12

L-4L-4 L-5L-5

L-2L-2

C-5C-5C-4C-4

C-1C-1

C-3C-3

C-7C-7

C-2C-2

C-6C-6 C-9C-9C-8C-8

L-8L-8

L-11L-11

L-7L-7

L-9L-9

L-6L-6

L-10L-10

• Cut this page along the dashed line so you can have it on hand as you read the contents of the manual.

■Left

Dial

CTK7300IN_e.book 164 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

1 - 16

Default

Changed

Note

Number

0 - 127

0 - 127 *1True voice

After

Touch

Control

Change

Pitch Bender

Key’s

Ch’s

Velocity

9nH v = 1 - 127

9nH v = 0, 8nH V =**

9nH v = 1 - 127

9nH v = 0

Note ON

Note OFF

Mode

Mode 3

0 - 127

Mode 3

Default

Messages

Altered

Model: CTK-7300IN Version : 1.0

0, 32

6, 38

16 - 19

70 - 90

Bank select

Modulation

Data entry LSB, MSB

Volume

Pan

Expression

Hold 1

Sostenuto

Soft pedal

Reverb send

(MSB only)

**: no relation

MIDI Implementation Chart

CTK7300IN_e.book 168 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時１分

Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

1 - 16

Default

Changed

Note

Number

0 - 127

0 - 127 *1True voice

Program

Change

0 - 127

:True #

After

Touch

Control

Change

Pitch Bender

System Exclusive

Key’s

Ch’s

Velocity

9nH v = 1 - 127

9nH v = 0, 8nH V =**

9nH v = 1 - 127

9nH v = 0

Note ON

Note OFF

Mode

Mode 3

0 - 127

Mode 3

Default

Messages

Altered

System

Common

: Song Pos

: Song Sel

: Tune

Aux

Messages

Remarks

: All sound off

: Reset all controller

: Local ON/OFF

: All notes OFF

: Active Sense

: Reset

System

Real Time

: Clock

: Commands

Model: CTK-7300IN Version : 1.0

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

O : Yes

X : No

0, 32

6, 38

16 - 19

70 - 90

98, 99

100, 101

Bank select

Modulation

Data entry LSB, MSB

Volume

Pan

Expression

Hold 1

Sostenuto

Soft pedal

Reverb send

Chorus send

NRPN LSB, MSB

RPN LSB, MSB

(MSB only)

*1: Depends on tone.

2: For details, see MIDI Implementation at http://world.casio.com/.

3: In accordance with pedal effect setting.

CTK7300IN_e_Cover1-4.fm 2 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時６分

CTK7300IN-E-1A

CTK-7300IN

USER’S GUIDE

Please keep all information for future reference.

Safety Precautions

Before trying to use the keyboard, be sure to read the

separate “Safety Precautions”.

MA1307-A Printed in China

CTK7300IN_e_Cover1-4.fm 1 ページ２０１３年７月１９日　金曜日　午後１２時６分

Casio Ctk 7300In Owners Manual CTK7300IN_e

CTK-7300IN Web_CTK7300IN-E-1A_EN CTK-7300IN | Electronic Musical Instruments | Manuals | CASIO

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation